JP7232483B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine for playing games using game media.

A pachinko machine, which is an example of a game machine, has a game panel provided with a game area. A player shoots a game ball into the game area using a ball launcher, and a general prize-winning hole is formed in the process of the game ball flowing down. When a prize is won, a predetermined number of game balls are released to the player as a prize for the prize, while when the game ball finishes flowing without winning, the game ball enters the out ball mouth and enters the game hall. recovered to the side.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 52-2541 Japanese Utility Model Laid-Open No. 51-161281 JP-A-2003-79845

Although such conventional gaming machines have been devised to enhance the enjoyment of games, there are still quite a few voices demanding gaming machines that are visually devised.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine with a visually enhanced visual aspect .

The present invention
A front constituent member which is attached from the front side of the game panel and which is attached from the rear side of the game panel, and which has a partition part that partitions a game area in which the game medium can roll and a non-game area in which the game medium cannot roll. A gaming machine having a back side configuration unit,
The front side constituent member includes a game area side design portion which is visible when the game area side is viewed from the front, and which is visible when the non-game area side is viewed from the front. The non-game area side design part provided on the non-game area side is provided on the non-game area side, and the game area side design part provided on the game area side and the non-game area side design part provided on the non-game area side are unified. has a design with
The back side structural unit is provided with a back side decorative portion having a predetermined decoration on the back side of the design of the front side structural member,
An intermediate design portion having uniformity with the design of the game area side design portion is provided on the front side of the back side decorative portion provided in the back side structural unit, and the game medium rolls on the front surface of the intermediate design portion. A game medium can be positioned in front of the intermediate design portion by making it a possible game area,
The rear side structural unit attached from the rear side of the game panel has a light emitting part, and the light emitted from the light emitting part emitted from the rear side of the game panel is softened in an indirect lighting manner by the design of the front side structural member. Thus, the light shielding property of the design of the front component member is enhanced.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine with a visual aspect .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where a door frame is opened from a body frame and the body frame is opened from an outer frame; FIG. Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame, showing another form. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the lid member removed. FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX of FIG. 36B(a); FIG. 37B is a cross-sectional view along the line YY of FIG. 37A including a partially enlarged view; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; (a) is a vertical cross-sectional front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member, and (b) is a cross-sectional plan view of the same. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal front view of the foul cover unit showing another tampering prevention means; (a) and (b) are enlarged views of essential parts of FIG. 37G showing the normal flow of game balls (foul balls), and (c) is an enlarged view of essential parts of FIG. . FIG. 4 is a plan view of the foul cover unit; FIG. 11 is a plan view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a longitudinal front view of the foul cover unit showing another tampering prevention means; (a) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 37K, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 37K showing a state in which a foul ball passes. 37A and 37B are enlarged views of the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing a state in which the operating line is disabled; 37A and 37B show a state in which the operation line disabling member is motorized, and are enlarged views corresponding to part Z in FIG. 37K showing a state in which the operation line is disabled. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a main part showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a central vertical cross-sectional view of the game board including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 108 is an enlarged view of arrow Z1 part of FIG. 108 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 108 is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX of FIG. 107; 112 is an enlarged view of a Z3 portion of FIG. 111; FIG. It is an end face front view of the game board cut in the middle of the thickness direction of the light guide plate. It is the front view of the game panel and center member which abbreviate|omits the back decoration member, and the front view which disassembled and arranged. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the base panel and front enclosing member of a game panel. It is a perspective view showing a base panel and a back decorative member of the game panel. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a base panel and a back decorative member of the game panel; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a production unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a production support frame and a drum unit of the production unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a drum unit of the production unit; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the rear cover of a production|presentation unit. FIG. 4 is a central vertical cross-sectional view of a main part for explaining the movement state of the drum; 105 is an enlarged view of a Z4 portion of FIG. 104; FIG. It is a partially enlarged front view of the door frame showing the handle unit. FIG. 126 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 125; Fig. 3 is an exploded sectional view showing the handle unit; FIG. 11 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main portion of the door frame showing another form of the handle unit; 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine having two handle units; FIG. It is a perspective view of a door frame provided with two handle units. It is a right side view of a door frame. 131 is an enlarged view of the Z5 section of FIG. 130; FIG. 130 is a partially enlarged front view of the door frame showing the handle unit on the right side of FIG. 129; FIG. FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional view taken along line TT of FIG. 133; FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state linearly moved from FIG. 134; Fig. 3 is an exploded sectional view showing the handle unit; FIG. 134 is a sectional view corresponding to the TT line of FIG. 133 showing the handle unit on the left side of FIG. 129; FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state linearly moved from FIG. 137; FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view along line UU of FIG. 138; FIG. 11 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main portion of the door frame showing another form of the handle unit;

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
An example of a game machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 to 128 for a pachinko machine 1, and a detailed description of a pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention with reference to FIGS. 129 to 140. FIG. For convenience of explanation, the side facing the player of the pachinko machine is called "front" or "front", and the opposite side is called "back" or "back".

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. 10A and 10B are perspective views of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

A pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and supporting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 which is an operation medium operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing movable effect and light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, it has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 that provide a predetermined number of game balls B). The obstacle nail is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a gate section 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player operates the handle unit 180 for player operation to perform game input for adjusting the hitting force, thereby hitting the game ball B with arbitrary strength. be able to. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, or the reverse effect unit 3100 to display a predetermined effect image, or a movable effect or A player can be entertained by performing a lighting effect.

In the pachinko machine 1, when a player rotates a handle 182 while game balls are stored in an upper tray 201, which will be described later, a game ball is launched by the ball launching device 540 with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The shot ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through the shot ball path formed by the shot path portion 1012 of the shot rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of game balls are opened by a payout device 580 described later according to the received winning opening. are dispensed onto the upper tray 201 from the top.

It should be noted that, in relation to the striking strength of the game ball, when the game ball fired with a strength that cannot reach the game area 5a, that is, with a weak launching force, does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. As shown in FIG. 37A, it falls into a foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the end (end) of the launch rail 544 and the end (start) of the outer rail 1001, and is returned as described later. A foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 forming the passage portion 1014 receives the foul ball, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 to be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment, the game ball B dropped onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge. Through the exit 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and the game ball B can be discharged between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one.
In addition, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 after being fired with a weak launching force by the ball launcher 540, to the lower plate 202, It is for guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 .

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and the lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. In this manner, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; , and reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1i. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tampering prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and also the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition portion 143a (waiting position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Then, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be fed (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button of the tray unit, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the movement of the operation transmission section. will also move relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is released. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An operating wire disabling member 700, which is a first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b so as to be accommodated therein. The operating wire disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. there is In addition, disabling the operation wire here means that the operation wire cannot be operated normally by cutting, pinching (pinching), entangling (winding up), or gluing with hot melt etc. It means to put into a state.

The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A first piece is vertically separated at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance to the left from the right side. A portion 701 and a second piece portion 702, and an inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 facing each other. and have. The first piece portion 701 of the operation wire disabling member 700 is bent with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation wire disabling member 700 so that the right end in front view in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece portion 702 extends on the same plane as the flat plate surface of the operating wire disabling member 700 . As a result, in a plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that widens in a V shape toward the right.

The operating wire disabling member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that a V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is positioned inside the ball supply port 142a. communicated with.

According to this operating wire nullifying member 700, an irregular ball (a game ball or a metal ball having a diameter approximately the same as that of a game ball) to which a flexible string-like operating wire (string, piano wire, wire or linear member such as a catheter) is attached. or a synthetic resin ball of approximately the same diameter) is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out on the side of the upper tray 201 attached to the illegal ball. When the operation line is operated to form an illegal ball path using an illegal ball, or an illegal act such as taking an illegal ball into or out of the first starting port 2002 is performed, the game is played by the ball launching device 540. By the force of the illegal ball fired (hit ball) with a strength that can reach the area 5a, the operating wire attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702. Then, the narrowed portion of the shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 can be cut like scissors, thus invalidating the operating line and using an irregular ball. It is possible to deter fraudulent acts that have been committed.
It should be noted that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the form described above, and may be of another form. For example, if it is configured to deter fraud by cutting or pinching the operating wire attached to the illegal ball, the metal plate may be bent in a form different from that described above, or the bent operating wire nullifying member 700 may be used. Alternatively, a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or pinching the operating wire attached to the irregular ball may be provided in place of the metal plate.
Also, if the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the waiting position (above the partition 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 can be replaced by a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). By detecting it with a sensor and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, it is possible to prevent the shooting of the illegal ball itself. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feed solenoid 145 does not drive for ball feed.

[3-1k. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the doorframe base unit 100 will now be described in detail, primarily with reference to Figures 36A and 36B. FIG. 36A (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 36B(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed and viewed from the back.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a force (a firing force that cannot reach the game area 5a) that is weaker than a predetermined force (a firing force that can reach the game area 5a). It is for guiding game balls B (foul balls) that have not reached inside to the lower tray 202, and guiding game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. .
As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .
The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and has a lower normal dispensing passage 610a of a lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and an upper dish ball supply port 211a which is an opening for balls of the dish unit 200. and a through-ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower full-tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. and a full tank ball receptacle 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front. A foul ball receiving portion 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball) dropped into a foul ball drop opening 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and A lower plate ball supply port 211c which is open forward near the lower corner and discharges game balls B received in a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving portion 150c forward, and is an opening for balls of the plate unit 200. and a communication passage 150h connecting the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. This communication passage 150h is composed of an upper passage wall 150i disposed on the lower side of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and a game ball extending from the upper passage wall 150i approximately 1 mile from the upper passage wall 150i. The lower passage walls 150j are arranged parallel to each other with a space between them. open downwards to the
A series of passages from the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h, and the storage passage 150e to the ball discharge port 150d is a foul ball return. A return passageway section 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line nullification member 7000 as second fraud prevention means for deterring fraud by the illegal ball Q to which the operation line L is attached. A foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between the rails 1001 is provided with operation line nullification members 7000H and 7000S as a third fraud prevention means.

The second operating wire disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is enlarged in FIG. As shown in the figure, the projections 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting hole 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting hole 152h of the cover member 152, and fixed (bonded) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i, Furthermore, for safety considerations, the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 cover and house the unit from the outside so that it is difficult for the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like to come in contact with it.
A specific operating wire nullifying member 7000 has components equivalent to those of the operating wire nullifying member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. The first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece portion 702 open in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball of the connecting passage 150h. A V-shaped shearing portion 7000v is formed.
In addition, in the foul cover unit 150 of this embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. , and is directed toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operating wire disabling member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k that can guide the operating line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on its upper surface, and has a folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i facing the lid member 152 side. A first inclined portion 150ka descending toward the operating wire nullifying member 7000 side, and a narrow width toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. and a tapered guiding portion 150k having a tapered second inclined portion 150kb (a shape capable of capturing the operating line L). Then, when the operating wire L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the irregular ball Q or the pulling force from the outside, slides on the guide portion 150k in a winding manner, the tension applied to the operating wire L causes the first inclined portion 150ka to move from the first inclined portion 150ka to the second position. The operating wire L is guided to the operating wire nullifying member 7000 so as to slide along the second inclined portion 150kb. As a result, the operating wire L can be reliably captured by the operating wire disabling member 7000 . In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of normal foul balls and the guidance of the operating wire L attached to the illegal ball Q. In order to make it easier to catch the operating line L, the corners of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be curved.

Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is made using the space communicating from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The installed illegal ball Q is made to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L that is projected to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is operated to form an illegal ball path using the illegal ball Q, or It is possible to deter fraudulent acts such as putting the ball Q in and out of the first starting port or the like.
For example, a fraudulent act such as pushing the illegal ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate to cause it to flow backward and send it to the firing position of the ball launcher 540 (hereinafter referred to as "fraudulent act"). A”) is played, if the illegal ball Q crosses the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c toward the firing position of the firing rail 544, Pulled by it (loaded with tension), the operating wire L turns around along the folded portion in a U-turn. Then, the operating wire L is guided to the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v formed by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and is finally cut. As a result, the operation line L cannot be manipulated, so that it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the illegal ball Q.
In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operating line L, and one of them is sent from the batted ball supply port 142a to the shooting position, and is intentionally made into a foul ball, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, is used. Even if a cheating act (hereinafter referred to as "cheating act B") of grabbing the operating line L connected to the illegal ball that became a foul ball from the player and shooting the following illegal ball Q into the game area 5a, The operating line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled (loaded with tension) by the subsequent launch of the illegal ball Q. L is pressed against the same folded portion, and the operating wire L enters the sheared portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above. It becomes possible. Note that FIGS. 37A and 37B are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where fraudulent act B is performed. In addition, with respect to the above-described fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line nullifying member 700 or the like, which is the first fraud prevention means, may not be sufficiently effective against an illegal ball Q that becomes a foul ball (for example, Even if the illegal ball Q is fired with a certain strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means), so this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has an effect. For this reason, when the fraudulent act B is targeted, the operation line nullification members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud prevention means, and the operation line nullification member 7000H as the third fraud prevention means to be described later. , 7000S are preferably used together as appropriate, and a first operation line disabling member 700 and a second operation line disabling member 7000 or third operation line disabling members 7000H and 7000S separate from it are provided. It is preferable to provide the pachinko machine 1 together. In this case, the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 are provided together on the side of the door frame 3 and are not exposed to the outside, so they are inconspicuous. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble, anti-fraud information is less likely to be leaked. In addition, since deterioration of the sharpness of the operating wire disabling members 700 and 7000 affects the crime prevention performance, if they are replaced together with the door frame 3, the crime prevention performance can be easily maintained.

By the way, the operating wire nullifying members 700 and 7000 serving as the above-described first and second fraud prevention means cut and invalidate the operating wire L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v. In other words, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to make it impossible to push or pull the flexible operation line L, or to make it difficult to push or pull the operation line L, making it impossible to easily operate the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L. You can disable it like this:

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 37C and 37D, the operating line nullifying member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion in the enlarged view of FIG. The front half of the non-joint portion at the tip of 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033 , and the rear half of the non-joint portion is a clamping portion 7044 . Such an operation line disabling member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and furthermore, for safety reasons, the unit main body 151 is designed so that it is difficult for an employee or a game machine assembler to come in contact with the hands. and is covered and housed by a lid member 152 from the outside.
According to the operating wire nullifying member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37D, the operating wire L is pulled by the illegal ball Q, and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded portion is turned around in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-bonded portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022. It is sandwiched by 7044 like tweezers.
As a result, the illegal ball Q flowing back from the lower tray ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the illegal ball Q intentionally fouled due to the illegal act B. reaches the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which is the ball opening, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line nullification members 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible control line L is pushed in from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, it only loosens there, and as a result, the amount of operation line L that is extended cannot be adjusted (illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a cannot be adjusted). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to deter cheating using the cheating ball Q.
In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joint portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joint portion is the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, a single metal plate is folded so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the leading end portion of one of the folded plate surfaces is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033 (induction portion). Alternatively, the sandwiching portion 7044 may be the narrow width portion of both plate surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while exhibiting the same effect as the fraud prevention effect described above.

Further, the operation line disabling member 7000 that sandwiches the operation line L is not shown, but is provided by placing a double-sided tape in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. to form an adhesive portion, and the operating line L guided to the second inclined portion 150kb is adhered to the adhesive portion so that it cannot move.

In addition, the operating wire disabling member 7000 for sandwiching the operating wire L consists of two metal plates 7011 and 7022, but is replaced with a coil spring as shown in FIG. The guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k and the central axis of the guiding portion 150k may be substantially perpendicular to each other. The operating wire L guided by the second inclined portion 150kb is fitted and sandwiched between adjacent coils of the coil spring.
Coil springs, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, while compression coil springs need to be installed in a compressed state. It is advantageous in terms of installation work.
In addition, the coil spring may of course be installed in a straight state when no load is applied, but as shown in FIG. This is preferable because the entry of the operating wire L becomes smoother.
When the operating wire disabling member 7000 is formed of a coil spring in this way, it can be manufactured at a low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

In addition, a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line nullification member 7000 from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) to block the guide portion 150k to the operation line nullification member 7000 with the cell plate. In order to deal with this, further fraudulent work is conceivable, but in the above-described form to deal with this, in the course change part of the return passage part 1014 of the foul ball (in this form, the part corresponding to the lower tray ball supply port 211c), A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 37A). As a result, it is possible to prevent further fraudulent work in which a foreign object is inserted from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) to block the guide portion 150k. In addition, as countermeasures against illegal work, such as inserting a foreign object such as a cell plate from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) to block the guide portion 150k, inserting a foreign object such as a cell plate into the slit 1015 as described above. Not limited to forming an intake port for taking in, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 37A, a configuration in which a projecting obstruction 1016 is provided to impede the arrival of a foreign object such as a cell plate by colliding with it to reach the guide portion 150k. As such, a higher degree of fraud prevention may be achieved.

Further, the first and second operating wire disabling members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that waits for the entry of the operating wire L and is disabled. , 37N and 37P, a dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D that actively nullifies the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be employed.

37K, 37L, and 37M show one embodiment of a dynamic actuation line disabling member 7000D that includes a foul ball return path (return path portion 1014). (a corner portion corresponding to just above the lower tray ball supply port 211c) is pivotally attached so as to be able to swing.

That is, in FIG. 37K, the operation line disabling member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped disabling portion 2646 protruding vertically from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion A shaft hole 2647 formed at the corner where the disabling portion 2645 and the disabling portion 2646 intersect, and an arcuate ball stop portion 2648 projecting rightward from the upper edge of the disabling portion 2646 and centering on the shaft hole 2647. A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture shown in FIG. It can swing to the release posture of b). A balance weight 2650 is provided on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the ball receiving portion 2646 across the shaft hole 2647 of the operation wire disabling member 7000D. The ball receiving posture of FIG. 37L (a) is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, the load of one game ball) acts on the part 2645, while the load of one game ball is applied to the ball receiving part 2645. When acted on, it swings to the release posture of FIG. 37L(b).
In addition, the edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is turned around the shaft hole 2647 to form an intersection side portion 2651 that crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release position shown in FIG. 37L(b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 having the above-described dynamic operating line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the connecting passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 37L(a). It flows down, and immediately after changing the course downward at the course changing section, it rides on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line disabling member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of this foul ball, the operation line disabling member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L(b). Then, the foul ball resting on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is released into the downstream storage passage 150e, and the operation line nullification member 7000D released from the foul ball is biased by the balance weight 2650. Return to the original ball receiving posture.
In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may occur at once. is stopped by an arcuate ball stop portion 2648, and after the operating wire disabling member 7000D moves back, processing continues. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls occur at the same time, they can be dealt with one by one without any trouble.

Next, the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D is subjected to the above-described illegal act B (a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the batted ball supply port 142a. Then, by intentionally shooting the illegal ball weakly, it is turned into a foul ball and taken out from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball, and furthermore, the operation line L connected to the illegal ball is grasped and the following illegal ball is played. When an illegal ball Q flows in due to a fraudulent act of shooting a ball Q into the game area 5a, the illegal ball Q flows down the connecting passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after the change, it rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating wire disabling member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37M(b). At this time, the invalidating portion 2646 of the operation wire invalidating member 7000D also rotates, and the intersecting side portion 2651 at the edge thereof traverses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the foul ball return path, the operating line L that passes through it naturally crosses, so the operating line L is caught between the crossing side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. entrapment). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operating line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating line nullifying member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D is located at a position where it cannot be reached even if a hand is inserted through the ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q stopped at this position will be taken out from the outside.
If the operation line L is made to meander between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 so as to make it difficult to reverse the operation line L, the state of being captured by the operation line disabling member 7000D can be prevented. It also becomes difficult to pull back the illegal ball Q toward the batted ball supply port 142a. As a result, the illegal ball Q remaining in the operation line nullifying member 7000D can be saved and recovered as an evidence ball.

The above-described dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D utilizes the weight of the illegal ball Q. The operation line nullification member 7000D is operated by an electric driving means as shown in FIG. 37N. good too.
That is, the operation line nullification member 7000D in FIG. 37N has a plunger 2654 of a solenoid 2653 as an electric driving means connected to the portion provided with the balance weight 2650, and a sphere detector connected to the nullification portion 2646 of the operation line nullification member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line nullification member 7000D shifts from the ball receiving posture to the release posture. Also, when a game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (the signal changes from the presence of the game ball to the absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 descends and the operating line The disabling member 7000D moves back from the release posture to the ball receiving posture.
When a normal foul ball rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating wire nullifying member 7000D, the occurrence and release of the foul ball are detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is activated accordingly. In order to operate appropriately, foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the dead weight operating line nullifying member 7000D.
On the other hand, when an illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation wire invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operating wire. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture along with the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646 as described above, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since ball detector 2655 is not signaled to release, plunger 2654 of solenoid 2653 remains in the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the aimed ball opening, illegality can be prevented.

Note that the above-described dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D cuts and disables the operation line L by providing a cutting blade in the intersecting side portion 2651 and/or the receiving portion 2652 of the disabling portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line disabling member 7000D of this embodiment has a function of preventing an illegal ball Q from entering from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 104, It can also be used as reverse prevention means. Therefore, a higher anti-fraud function is exhibited.
In addition to the above configuration, the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D has, for example, a disabling portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retreats to open and close the connecting passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate is an intersecting side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed downstream of the movable area of the intersecting side in the middle of the flow path of the connecting passage 150h, and the movable area of the intersecting side is The illegal ball Q after passing is detected by the ball detector to activate the invalidation part, and the operating line L is pinched or cut at the crossing side crossing the connecting passage 150h. may
Also, the dynamic operating wire disabling member 7000</b>D described above can also be applied to the first operating wire disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 . Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operating line nullifying member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operating line nullifying member 7000D. In this case, the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, so that the illegal deterrence effect can be reliably enhanced.

FIG. 37P also shows a dynamic operating wire disabling member 7000D that winds and disables the operating wire L. FIG.
That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D has a square ring-shaped disabling portion 2646 mounted in the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable about a rotating shaft 2656 perpendicular to the passage. , a motor 2657 as an electric driving means for rotating the invalidation portion 2646, and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the invalidation portion 2646 as an intersecting side portion 2651 downstream from the movable (rotating) region of the intersecting side portion 2651. and a ball detector 2655 provided in the ball detector 2655. Each time the ball detector 2655 detects a foul ball, the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once.
When a normal foul ball enters the foul cover unit 150 equipped with such an operation line disabling member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the disabling portion 2646, and the ball is detected. When detected by the device 2655, the invalidation part 2646 idles once, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside from the ball opening.
On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B flows into the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the operation line nullification member 7000D, the operation line L is also nullified when the illegal ball Q passes through the nullification portion 2646. Since the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655 and the invalidation part 2646 rotates once, the operation line L winds around the invalidation part 2646 because it passes through the invalidation part 2646 . Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stays within the connecting passage 150h, there is no possibility that it will fall into the wrong hands.
The ball detector 2655 for detecting the illegal ball Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operating line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, useless idle rotation of the operating wire disabling member 7000D for winding the operating wire L can be eliminated.

The above description of the dynamic operating line disabling member includes the following technical ideas.
"A game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball shooting device for shooting game balls;
a shooting passage portion forming a shot ball passage that communicates with the game area from the shooting position of the ball shooting device;
a return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the shot ball passage and a ball opening for releasing game balls to the outside in front of the machine;
a fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation from the front of the operating line attached to the fraudulent ball,
The fraud prevention means is an operation wire invalidation member that invalidates the operation wire by pinching, cutting, or winding the operation wire,
The operation line nullifying member has an intersecting side portion crossing the foul ball return path of the game ball, and operates the intersecting side portion after the illegal ball passes through the movable area of the intersecting side portion to operate the foul ball. A game machine characterized in that the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is made to cross the return passage, and the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut, or wound up at the crossing side to be invalidated. ”

10A, 10B, 37A, 37I, and 37J, the third tamper-proof means provided at the above-described foul ball drop opening 1013 is the end (terminal) of the launch rail 544. part) and an operation line disabling member 7000S provided at the end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, the rail base 1001x made of resin).

The operating wire disabling member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is formed into a comb shape so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. are covered with safety cover portions 1017 arranged in rows. Note that the cutting blade is supported by this safety cover portion 1017 .
Therefore, as described above, using a special tool such as a cell plate to push the illegal ball Q from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the return passage portion 1014 to cause it to flow backward and send it to the firing position of the ball launching device 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls toward the firing position due to the inclination, it pulls (tension is applied) and the operating line L becomes the operating line nullifying member. It is cut by touching the cutting edge of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.
In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operating line L, one of which is sent to the shooting position from the batted ball supply port 142a, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening. Even if the illegal act B of grasping the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q and shooting the following illegal ball Q into the game area 5a is performed, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage part 1014 is returned. Since the operating wire L touches the cutting blade of the operating wire disabling member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10A, 37A, and 37I, the operation line disabling member 7000S provided on the resin-made rail base 1001x that constitutes the outer rail 1001 is made of a large number of hard resin wires in a brush shape. Protruding.
According to this operation line nullification member 7000S, if an illegal ball Q reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state connected to the operation line L, the end of the operation line L is connected to the lower dish ball supply port which is the opening for balls. 211c, when the operating line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the tension causes the operating line L to pull the wires of the operating line nullifying member 7000S. Therefore, even if the force of the hand manipulating the operating wire L is loosened in order to lower the illegal ball Q, the operating wire L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire members of the operating wire nullifying member 7000S. The movement of the hand loosened from the ball is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. In other words, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, fraudulent actions using the illegal ball Q can be deterred.

As described above, the third fraud prevention means is such that the operation line disabling member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side is effective in the early stages of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the side operation line invalidating member 7000S exerts its effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.
Of course, it is also possible to use either one of the operation line nullification members 7000H and 7000S alone, and the specific nullification members of the operation line nullification member 7000H and the operation line nullification member 7000S can also be used. The forms may be interchanged, or the same disabling member may be employed.
In addition to the case where the operation line disabling members 7000H and 7000S are made into separate parts and attached to the firing rail 544 or the outer rail 1001 as in this embodiment, for example, the metal plate that constitutes the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to disable the operation line. Alternatively, a wire rod is integrally formed with the resin rail base 1001x that constitutes the outer rail 1001, or a V groove is formed at the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. A clamping portion 7000Sv may be engraved, and the operating wire L may be guided and clamped in the recess of the clamping portion 7000Sv.
Furthermore, the operating wire disabling member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operating wire disabling member 7000 as shown in FIG. , 7022, and the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001 is provided with a guiding portion 150k composed of a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb.

As described above, the form in which the second operation line disabling member 7000 for disabling the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014. Although the form provided in the drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is of course not limited to the above form.
For example, in the above embodiment, the operating wire disabling member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the connecting passage 150h. The disabling member 7000 may be provided at the exit portion of the communication passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 37A), provided at the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 1001 and the trailing end of the launch rail 544, respectively. It may be provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014 on the condition that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is pulled straight by a person. The installation position of the operation line disabling member 7000 of this embodiment is a position that the player cannot touch even if he inserts his fingertip into the ball opening. It is preferable from the viewpoint of crime prevention, which makes it difficult to illegally manipulate the member 7000 itself.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operating wire disabling member 7000 is provided on one side of the connecting passage 150h. A cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 37F (a) and (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the beginning portion of the communication passage 150h are formed into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017 so that the cutting edge of the cutting blade is are designed not to be touched. In this case, the cutting blade of the operating wire disabling member 7000 has a well-known folded blade structure or tip structure, which is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and is connected to the unit main body 151. A loading port 1019 and a discharging port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blades are pushed out in a rolling manner so that they can be replaced with new ones.
37F (a) and (b), reference numeral 1021 denotes a clipping split line portion for the operating line L cut into the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the clipping split line portion 1021 is provided with the operating line L. It is designed to be eaten. Therefore, even if the operating wire disabling member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operating wire L, the operating wire L can bite into the pinching split line portion 1021 of the bottom wall 150g or the like. improves.

In addition, although the above embodiment shows an example in which foul balls are returned to the lower tray, there are gaming machines that are structured to return foul balls to the upper tray (including cases where there is no lower tray). In this case, a fraudulent act (the above-described fraudulent acts A and B There is a risk that fraudulent acts similar to In the case of such a game machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided in a predetermined portion of the foul return path located in the space communicating from the upper tray ball supply port to the game area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. can.

Further, in the above embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the body frame 4 side.

Further, in the above embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means, but a plurality of the second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the form described above are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (each of the folded portions) has a second shape like the form described above. Fraud prevention means may be provided. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent actions using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, in the above embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with a metal plate as the second tampering prevention means, but instead of the metal plate, a resin molding having the same configuration is provided. Alternatively, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so that it can function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate, which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment, is not provided, and instead, a tapered shape is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest part (narrowest part) of the guiding part 150k, a slit-shaped capturing part is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage part 1014, The operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q may be pinched by the capture portion, which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same fraud deterrence effect as the above-described configuration.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operating wire L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operating wire disabling member 7000. , FIG. 37H and FIG. 37K, the illegal ball Q prevents the illegal ball Q from entering through the ball opening (prevents the illegal ball Q from moving backwards and backwards) without affecting the normal flow down of the foul ball. By providing advance prevention means, fraudulent use of an illegal ball Q is prevented.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37G, a dedicated tool such as a cell plate (foreign object) for pushing the illegal ball Q into the course changing portion (the portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014 In addition, it can be exemplified to provide an attracting part 1022 for inducing the illegal ball Q itself to another passage to block its movement (first illegal ball reverse prevention means). As a result, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as the above-described cheating action A in which an illegal ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of a normal foul ball. In addition, at the inlet of the attracting portion 1022, a catch valve (which allows the illegal ball Q flowing backward to enter the attracting portion 1022 and is swingable only in the direction in which it enters the attracting portion 1022) is provided. A single-opening valve (not shown) may be provided to disable the withdrawal of the ball Q, thereby leaving traces of the use of the illegal ball Q and evidence of the illegal act.
Also, as shown in FIG. 37H, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the downward flow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (backflow). It is possible (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). With such a configuration as well, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as the above-described cheating action A in which an illegal ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of a normal foul ball. Note that the operation line disabling member 7000D in FIG. 37K is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023 described above.
Further, it is of course possible to combine both the static operation line disabling member and the dynamic operation line disabling member described above.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an operating wire invalidating member other than the first operating wire invalidating member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014. It may be provided between the firing position or between the foul ball drop opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002 .

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 (see FIGS. 29 and 31 to 33) of the door frame base unit 100, and is operated by the player to move the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the game board 5. can be hit in the game area 5a.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cap 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation start point when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and an inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first projection 182a protrudes so that the side surface of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front bulges outward, and the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side bulges out. The side of the direction is concave (gouged) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes most protrudingly so that the clockwise side surface when viewed from the front bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface on the opposite side curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle cap 185 has a round front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cap 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cap 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, that is, a strength input by the player.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. An annular performance operation ring 330 having an cage rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring transmission for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁As is clear from the description so far, the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, and the like are projected toward the player side in the middle area in the left-right direction of the lower half of the front surface of the door frame 3. Constructs a forward-bulging structure.

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning the cash or prepaid card put into the machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. - 特許庁

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and an upper right plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the upper left and lower plate decoration units 270 and 280, respectively, and the upper right and lower right plate decoration units 275 and 280, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 340. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are continuous with the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 are caused to emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and it is possible to make it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operating section base 320 of the effect operating unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 340, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340, and rotates together with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5e-7. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more diverse effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, and a central hole 364b that penetrates vertically. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. . On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of this embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. there is Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the top door frame unit 450 and the top decoration body 453 of the door frame. is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of the

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window trims 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from above, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the lateral outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the respective mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front upper and left sides of the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable on the side, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. , and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 .

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and the tank rail 553 is mounted at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). formed (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in this embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door frame is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. It is configured to be As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is made of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball shooting device 540 is designed so that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the shooting position at the right end of the upper surface of the shooting rail 544, and the game ball B is delivered to the shooting position of the shooting rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the supplied state, the shooting solenoid 542 is driven with the strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B struck by the ball hitting mallet 543 passes through the shooting ball passage (see FIG. 37A) of the shooting rail 544 and the shooting passage portion 1012 consisting of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and then through the game area 5a. beaten inside.

In addition, when the launched game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., as shown in FIG. A foul ball falls from a foul ball drop port 1013 opened in the back to a foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 that constitutes the return passage portion 1014, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and passes through the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening. It is discharged to the lower tray 202 .

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion that is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. There is an opening downward near the left end of the bucket.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 97) and The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, etc., and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The rear cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. It is for playing a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstructing nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 within the game area 5a (not shown). In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) that controls the content.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat plate-shaped base panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 , and the front component 1000 which holds the outer periphery of the base panel 1110 . and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A large prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted in either of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. , a side unit 2200 having two general prize winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a starting unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and having one general winning mouth 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting mouth 2004, and a big winning mouth 2005, a starting mouth unit 2100 and A frame-shaped center member 2500 is provided above the side unit 2200 and attached slightly above the approximate center in the front view in the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600; and a plurality of back effect units 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front constituent member 1000 has an out ball opening 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out ball opening 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1010 is aligned with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 are penetrated and the lower full-fill ball is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
A game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat plate-shaped base panel 1110 whose outer circumference is formed slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the base panel 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this base panel 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the base panel 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The base panel 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out ball opening 1008 of the front component 1000, which is the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of through holes 1112 are formed through the base panel 1110 in the front-to-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the base panel 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the base panel 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the base panel 1110, is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a through hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has the same size as the play area 5a. It has

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1122 is formed to match the cutout portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1010 and the cutout portion 1122 are penetrated. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B ejected to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball opening 1008 and the game balls B ejected downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and have.

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening through the panel relay board 3031. A sensor 3001 , a first start sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, as shown enlarged in FIG. 99, displays a state indicator 1401 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. and a normal design indicator 1402 consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation indicator 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate part 2003.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port. A first special reserved number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by accepting game balls B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator 1406 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result, and a second special reserved number indicator 1407 consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" or the like. a display 1408;

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box at the approximate center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. With the liquid crystal screen facing forward, the effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c that are open on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, thereby locking the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. front unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the base panel 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A large prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted either according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting opening 2002 is arranged directly above the out ball opening 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003 . The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 on the upper right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction.

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the out-ball opening 1008 in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has one general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002, and a starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 having two general prize winning openings 2001 is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and a side unit 2200 is attached on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front. An attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center member 2500 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. and a display effect unit 2600 attached to the center member 2500. - 特許庁

The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a second start opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a large opening. A large winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 is provided (see FIG. 102). In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a starting opening solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. An attacker solenoid 2405 for opening and closing the big prize opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B to the 2004 is provided.

The center member 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center in front view. Installed on the front. The center member 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center member 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference except for the lower side, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center member 2500 has a warp entrance 2501, which is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, and a frame in which the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. and a stage shelf 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction.

The stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 has a curved shape in which the central side in the left-right direction is depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center member 2500 is positioned on the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110). ), the center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage shelf 2503 is arranged so that the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both left and right sides are lowered forward. It is inclined, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center member 2500 is assembled to the game board 5 , the raised portion (top) in the center of the stage shelf 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it will be received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

When the center member 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the center member 2500 is located between the right side of the center in the horizontal direction of the upper surface and the upper portion of the right side in a front view, and the outer periphery (the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005) of the game area 5a. is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed. An attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper right side surface of the center member 2500 . Therefore, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center member 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to receive the game ball B to the large winning opening 2005 that is open (open) with a high probability.

Although not shown in detail, the display effect unit 2600 is selected according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , and has a plurality of effect decorations that move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light-emitting effects. The display effect unit 2600 can appropriately use a plurality of effect decorations to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., and by appropriately combining them, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player. As well as making it difficult for the player to get bored, the player can be entertained by various presentations, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected. In addition, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. be done.

Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 102).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600; A back effect unit 3100 is provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and a liquid crystal mounting portion. A notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached is provided from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side of the portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

The panel relay board 3031 includes the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the starting opening solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the second It is for relaying the connection with the starting point sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003 .

Although not shown in detail, the back effect unit 3100 is drawn according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , and has a plurality of effect decorations that move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light-emitting effects. The back effect unit 3100 can appropriately use a plurality of effect decorations to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, and the like, and by appropriately combining them, various pattern effects can be presented to the player. As well as making it difficult for the player to get bored, the player can be entertained by various presentations, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). A peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B passing through the gate section 2003, and a game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 Detection signals from the big winning opening sensor 2403 that detects B, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input through the main control I/O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting drive signals to the starter solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405. , from the main control I / O port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator 1401, normal symbol indicator 1402, normal pending indicator 1403, first special symbol indicator 1404, first special pending number indicator 1405, second special A drive signal is output to the symbol display 1406, the second special reservation number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the prize winning sensor 2403. For the general winning hole sensor 3001, a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so that the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the second starting hole sensor 2402 , and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the big winning hole sensor 2403 . On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. In addition, the main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball tank 552 and a tank rail during maintenance. 553, a ball guide unit 570, and a ball extraction switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) to start the ball extraction operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is inputted to the payout control input circuit and inputted to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In addition, the power board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid or for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc. provided in the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board. to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 that indicates that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, , 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control by using it together with WDT.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. ) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board of the game board 5, are multiple serial input commands different from the display commands. It is performed by the output port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

The effect driving board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command to the LED of each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, or based on the received game board side lighting blinking command A lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 .

In addition, the performance drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, each drive motor provided on the game board 5, and the like. output to

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively.

[7. Game content]
The game contents of the above pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described pachinko machine 1, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to input the hitting force adjustment. The stored game ball B passes through the launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a, thereby playing the game with the game ball B. be started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center member 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110), and the game ball B is attached to the obstacle nail. By coming into contact with , the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center member 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstructing nails (not shown) and hits the center. The area on the left side of the member 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center member 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage shelf 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage shelf 2503 rolls on the stage shelf 2503 and moves back and forth to the left and right, from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on the left and right sides of the top. Released forward. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central top part of the stage shelf 2503, the top part is located directly above the first start opening 2002, so it is accepted by the first start opening 2002 with a high probability. be done. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

When the game ball B rolling on the stage shelf 2503 is released into the game area 5 a from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100 . The game ball B released from the stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 into the game area 5a is the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001 of the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400 There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001, etc.

By the way, if the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center member 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 pulls it toward the center in the left-right direction, and enters the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the starting opening. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first starting port 2002 of the unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center member 2500 in the game area 5a enters to the right of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500 (hereinafter, simply referred to as "right hitting"). ) and is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 through the right side of the center member 2500 . This portion is provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the closed second start opening. 2004 will be in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 will be possible. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, to the upper tray 201. paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal fluctuation time is, the more the game ball B that draws the "normal hit" in the gate section 2003 is accepted by the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 changes the advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery is held for special lottery results that generate medium hits, small hits, probability fluctuation (probability variation) hits, and time reduction (time reduction) hits.Then, the drawn special lottery results are determined Time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time) is suggested to the player.In addition, the lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The special lottery results include "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change" There are short time hits”, “no variable time short hits”, etc.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, a lot of the game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. can.

When the special lottery result is a "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big win", after the big winning hole 2005 becomes an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or to the big winning hole 2005 Acceptance of a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) to make the game ball B unacceptable in a closed state. is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this form, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be done. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without holding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation, and the operation button elevation drive motor By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, and the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, etc. , movable effects, etc., can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b or the rotation operation of the rotating operation portion 302 causes the vibration speaker 354 to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

In addition, as described below, the above-described embodiments include a background art with Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29741 as a prior patent document and many technical means for solving problems.

[Background technology]
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board having a game area in which games are played, and a door frame having a door window that closes the front side of the game board and allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front. , and the player can be entertained by playing a game within the game area that can be seen through the door window.

A gaming machine of this type is provided with a storage tray for storing game media for playing a game, and includes a bulging portion that bulges forward from below the door window on the front surface of the door frame, and a bulging portion. and a decorative body attached to the top surface has been proposed (eg, prior patent documents). According to the technology of this prior patent document, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

However, in the technique of the prior patent document, since the decorative body is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion, it is difficult to see the decorative body when the game machine is viewed from the front or the side. The decorative effect of the body was weak, and the appeal to the players was insufficient. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his/her hand on the storage plate, a part of the decoration is hidden by the player's hand. In such a case, it becomes difficult for the player to notice the luminous decoration, and there is a possibility that some players may feel lost due to not noticing the luminous decoration and lose their interest in the game.

[Problems to be solved]
In view of the above circumstances, a gaming machine is provided which is highly appealing to players and capable of suppressing the decline in the interest of players in games by means of light-emitting decorations.

[Technical means to solve the problem]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played,
a body frame detachably holding the game board from the front;
a door frame base that closes the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable, and has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front;
a bulging portion that bulges forward from a portion of the front surface of the door frame base below the door window, and includes a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game in the game area; ,
attached to the bulging portion, forward of the front end of the storage tray and extending forward from the front surface of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base; a protruding decorative body;
a decoration light-emitting means for causing the decoration to emit light according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area.

Here, "game" is defined as "a game medium is aimed at a specific receiving port where a special lottery is held to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the game medium is delivered to the specific receiving port. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs due to acceptance is drawn, a specific receiving port for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by receiving the game media, so the game media are aimed at the specific receiving port. "A game in which a game medium is hit", "A game in which a game medium is hit by aiming at a receiving port where benefits including payout of the game medium are given", "After inserting the game medium, a plurality of symbols each provided with a plurality of symbols A game in which the rotation of each of the spinning bodies is stopped so that a combination of symbols that gives a privilege including the payout of game media is obtained after rotating the spinning bodies. Examples of the above-mentioned "game media" include "spherical objects (game balls)", "disk-shaped objects (medals)", and the like.

In addition, the ``game area'' in which games are played is defined as ``a plurality of receiving slots into which game media are inserted by the player's operation, and benefits including payout of the game media are given according to the acceptance of the game media. "A region where a plurality of symbols are provided", "each of which is provided with a plurality of symbols, which are rotated by the player's start operation when the game medium is inserted, and are stopped by the player's stop operation. A region in which a plurality of bollards are arranged in which a privilege including payout of game media is provided accordingly”, and the like.

In addition, the "main body frame" includes "a thing that can be opened and closed (rotating hinges) with respect to a frame-shaped outer frame attached to the island facility of the game hall where the game machine is installed", "the game machine Examples include those that are directly attached to the island facility of the game hall to be installed, those that are equipped with a game medium payout device for playing games, and the like.

In addition to the storage tray, the 'swelled section' may also include 'equipped with an operation section operated by a player to play a game', or 'a storage tray for storing game media for playing a game'. ``Equipped with a production operation unit that allows the operation of the player to be accepted when the player participation type production is executed'', ``A lending operation unit that lends out the game medium for playing the game ”, and the like.

Further, examples of the "storage tray" include "a plurality of which are vertically spaced apart", "a single one", and the like.

Furthermore, as the "decorative body", there are "things imitating a predetermined item in line with the concept of the game machine", "things imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the game machine", and "things imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the game machine". imitated a predetermined scene”, and the like. The reason why the distance from the front surface of the door frame base to the front end of the decoration is within the range of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base is that if the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the total width, This is because the amount of forward protrusion is about the same as that of a conventional game machine, and the appeal to the player cannot be sufficiently enhanced. This is because there is a risk that the game machine will become a hindrance to the player, making it difficult for the game machine to be selected as a game machine.

In addition, as "according to the game state", "a game to a reception opening (for example, general winning opening, start opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening, V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area "In accordance with the receipt of the medium", "In response to the game medium circulating in the game area passing through a specific area (e.g., gate, warp passage, stage shelf, etc.)", "In response to placement in the game area Depending on the result of a special lottery drawn by receiving game media into a receiving port (e.g., starting port), "lottery by receiving game media into a receiving port (e.g., starting port) arranged in the game area Depending on the type of effect (for example, ready-to-win effect, jackpot effect, losing effect, etc.) for suggesting the result of the special lottery drawn, "Multiple designs with multiple patterns triggered by the introduction of game media "In response to the rotation of the turret", "A plurality of turrets each provided with a plurality of patterns are rotated after the insertion of the game medium, and then sequentially stopped, and according to the combination of the patterns of the stopped turrets , "according to the amount of game media struck into the game area", "according to the length of the blank of the game medium struck into the game area", and the like.

In addition, as the "decorative body light emitting means", there are "full color LED", "single color LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", "cold cathode tube", and the like. mentioned.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine includes a game board having a game area where a game is played, a body frame detachably holding the game board from the front, and a front side of the body frame that can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and the part below the door window on the front of the door frame base bulges forward. a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game in the region; and a bulging portion attached to the front end of the storage tray and forward from the front surface of the door frame base. A decorative body whose front end protrudes to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base, and light-emitting decoration according to the game state that changes when the decorative body is played in the game area. and a decorative body light-emitting means that causes the light to flow.

As a result, a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward at a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that opens and closes the main body frame. In addition, the protruding portion is provided with a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base and having a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. As a result, when the game machine is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the decorative body protrudes greatly forward below the door window through which the inside of the game area can be seen, making the decorative body more conspicuous than other game machines. As a result, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, enhance the appeal to the player, and make it easier for the player to select this gaming machine as a gaming machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body protrudes greatly forward under the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage dish, and the length of the decorative body in the horizontal direction can be made longer than before. can be longer. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his or her hand on the storage plate, it is possible to reduce the part of the decorative body that is hidden by the player's hand. To make it easy for a player to notice the luminous decoration of the decorative body when the luminous decoration is made by the decorative body luminous means, to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be made

In addition, since the ornament is projected forward greatly below the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the ornament is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, when the decoration is light-embellished by the decoration light-emitting means according to the game state, the light illuminates the player from below, and the player's line of sight is directed to the decoration by the light-emitting decoration of the decoration. At the same time, by directing the player's line of sight to the lower decorative body, it is possible to keep the inside of the game area provided in front away from the player's field of view and make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area. . Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, and when the variable winning opening (second start opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening, etc.) opens and closes , etc., by lighting the decorations with the decoration light emitting means, the player's attention is directed to the decorations below the game area, and when the player returns his/her line of sight to the game area, By changing the effect image, the movable body, etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, and the player can be entertained, and at the same time, there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that the player is not interested in the game, thereby increasing the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration body can be illuminated according to the game state to attract the player's attention, and the player can be surprised by changing the performance in the game area during that time. can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state (“jackpot game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the luminous decoration is applied to the decorative body. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the ornaments are projected greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire ornaments, the player moves away from the game machine, so that the entire game machine including the game area can be easily seen. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the game has been put aside for a while, and the player can be relaxed to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, the decorative body may be smoothly curved and protruded forward. As a result, the decorative body projecting greatly forward is smoothly curved, so that there is no risk of hurting the player even if the decorative body comes into contact with the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decoration is not dangerous enough to cause an injury at a glance of the decoration, so that the player can select the game machine with peace of mind. This allows the player to enjoy the game on the game machine and suppress the loss of interest.

Moreover, it is desirable to attach the decorative body to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to make the presence of the ornament stand out and attract the player's interest strongly, thereby increasing the appeal to the player and making it easier for the player to select this gaming machine. In addition, when the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to make it easier for the player to extend both hands forward. It is possible to facilitate the operation and handling of the game media stored in the storage tray, thereby making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the loss of interest.

Further, the decorative body may be provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular cross section. As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body is shaped like a half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut protruding forward, so that it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression. It is possible to make the player play the game in a calm mood, to make the player concentrate on the game and to suppress the decline in interest, and to prevent the player from being injured even if the player touches it at first glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is safe, and to make the player feel at ease, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game. Further, in the case where the decoration is provided with the semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration portion, when the entire first decoration portion is illuminated by the decoration body light-emitting means according to the game state, it looks like an annular fluorescent lamp. The luminous decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Since it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the light is moving and rotating, it is possible to surprise the player and make him think that something good is happening, thereby increasing his expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making it possible.

Furthermore, when the decoration is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration, the front end is arranged below the first decoration so that it is positioned behind the first decoration, and has a semicircular cross section. A second decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward may be further provided. As a result, the first decorative part and the second decorative part make it possible for the player to see the decoration as if half-doughnuts are arranged vertically, and the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage plate can be improved. In addition, since the tip of the second decorative part is located behind the tip of the first decorative part, the perspective can be emphasized by the second decorative part to make the decoration appear larger, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to make the gaming machine highly appealing, strongly attracting the interest of players. Further, in this case, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged vertically, each of them is appropriately luminous and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, so that the light is emitted in such a manner that the light rotates. It is possible to show the player a performance or a light emission performance in which the light moves up and down to entertain the player, and at the same time, to show the player a variety of light emission performances to keep the player from getting bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to make it difficult.

Further, an effect operation section may be provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body so that the player's operation can be accepted according to the game state. As a result, when the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type production is executed), the player can operate the production operation unit to enable the player participation type production. The performance can be enjoyed, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, by lighting up the decoration with the decoration lighting means, the player's interest can be attracted to the decoration attached to the production operation unit, so that the player who operates the production operation unit can When the participatory performance is executed, the decorative body is decorated with light, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (performance operation part) and the operation of the performance operation part can be urged, and the player can perform the performance operation. By operating the part, it is possible to entertain the player's participatory performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the effect operation section is attached behind the front end of the top surface of the decoration, the decoration can prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, etc. from coming into contact with the effect operation section. Therefore, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the performance operation section, and to surely enjoy the player-participation type performance that operates the performance operation section, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, when the effect operation part is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation part looks large and can give a strong impact to the player. In addition to making it easier to select a machine, the game progresses (for example, game medium (game balls), insertion of game media (medals) to start rotation of the rotating body, etc.), thereby entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the case where the performance operation section is provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body, the performance operation section includes an annular rotation operation section that can be rotated by the player, and an inner ring of the rotation operation section. It is desirable to provide a pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player. As a result, since the rotation operation section capable of rotating operation and the pressing operation section capable of pressing operation are provided as the production operation section, the rotation operation can be performed in the player participation type production in which the operation of the production operation section can be accepted. Since it is possible to allow the player to operate by appropriately combining and pressing operations, it is possible to respond to effects that require more complicated input (player's operation), so that more diverse player participation type effects can be played. The game can be presented to a player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less bored, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed. Further, in this case, the decoration having the rotating operation part and the pressing operation part attached to the upper surface can be illuminated by the decoration lighting means, so that the decoration can be illuminated when the player participatory performance is executed. The luminous decoration makes it possible to direct the attention of the player to the decorative body (the effect operation part such as the rotary operation part and the pressing operation part) and prompt the player to operate the effect operation part. By allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type production, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation part or to press the pressing operation part according to the lighting mode of the decorative body. The operation part can be accurately operated, and the player's participatory performance can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, when an annular rotary operation part and a pressing operation part arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part are provided as the rendering operation part on the upper surface of the ornament, the pressing operation can be performed. The part can be moved between a retracted position slightly projecting upward from the upper surface of the rotary operation part and a projecting position projecting upward from the retracted position according to the game state. good. As a result, when the pressing operation part is moved to the protruding position according to the game state, the pressing operation part protrudes upward from the rotating operation part, so that the upper surface of the ornament is large together with the rotating operation part. Since it is in a state as if it bulges upward, it is possible to make the surroundings of the decorations appear larger and give a strong impact to the players, and to make the decorations more conspicuous and to enhance the appeal to the players more than other game machines. In addition, since the pressing operation part protrudes greatly upward, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation part, and the player's expectation for the operation of the pressing operation part can be enhanced, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

Further, when the pressing operation part in the ring of the rotary operation part attached to the upper surface of the ornament is movable between the retracted position and the protruded position, the player can move the pressing operation part at the protruded position. A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part that can be pressed, and a cylindrical center that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation part and can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruded position. You may make it comprise with a press operation part. As a result, on the upper surface of the decoration that protrudes greatly forward, the peripheral pressing operation part and the rotating operation part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. To strongly attract a player's interest, to heighten the player's expectation for a player-participation type performance in which each operation part is operated, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest. can be done. Also, in this case, by making the ornaments light-emitting, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the ornaments, and in turn, to the rotary operating section, the outer peripheral pressing operating section, and the central pressing operating section, thereby prompting the player to operate them. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by entertaining the player participatory performance.

Furthermore, when the upper surface of the decorative body is provided with the effect operation part, it is desirable to provide an operation part light emitting means for lighting the effect operation part according to the game state. As a result, the effect operation part can be illuminated by the operation part light emitting means according to the game state. The whole bulging part bulging forward under the door window can be decorated with luminescence, the bulging part can be made conspicuous to strongly attract the player's interest, and the whole can be decorated with luminescence. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest. Further, in this case, by lighting up the production operation section with the operation section light-emitting means, the player's interest in the production operation section can be strongly attracted to the production operation section. When it is executed, the effect operation part is decorated with light, so that the player's interest can be directed to the effect operation part and the operation can be urged, and by making the player operate the effect operation part, the player participatory effect. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the front surface of the door frame base may further include a peripheral edge decoration that is continuous with the decoration attached to the bulging portion and extends so as to surround the outer periphery of the door frame. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the game area can be decorated, the appearance of the game machine can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. Further, in this case, it is desirable to provide peripheral edge decoration light emitting means for luminous decoration of the peripheral edge decoration. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area and suppress the decline of interest.

Also, an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image may be provided in the center of the game area when viewed from the front. As a result, the player can be entertained by the effect image displayed on the effect display means in addition to the game performed in the game area, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, when the performance image is switched while the performance image is being displayed by the performance display means, the decoration is made to emit light so that the player's line of sight is directed toward the decoration in the lower part of the game area, so that the switching of the performance image is hardly noticed. can do. Then, when the player turns his or her line of sight to the performance display means after the performance image is switched, the player can be surprised by the change in the performance image, and the performance image can be enjoyed more. The switching of the images can make the player think that something good is going to happen, heighten the player's expectation for the game, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The said ornament is
It is characterized by being smoothly curved and protruding forward.

According to the configuration of means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved and protruded forward.

As a result, the decorative body protruding greatly forward is smoothly curved, so there is no risk of hurting the player even if it comes into contact with the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decoration is not dangerous enough to cause an injury at a glance of the decoration, so that the player can select the game machine with peace of mind. This allows the player to enjoy the game on the game machine and suppress the loss of interest.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The said decoration is
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

According to the configuration of means 3, the decorative body is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

As a result, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, thereby appealing to the player. This game machine can be made easier to select as a game machine for playing with increased strength. In addition, since the decorative body projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to make it easier for the player to extend both hands forward. ) and the handling of the game media stored in the storage tray can be facilitated, and stress is less likely to be applied to the player, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said decoration is
It is characterized by having a first ornamental portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular cross section.

According to the configuration of means 4, the ornamental body is provided with a first ornamental portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular cross section.

As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body extends in a semicircular shape so that the cross section of the semicircular arc bulges outward, so that half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. Since it has a form that looks like it is hanging, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, to make the player play the game in a calm mood, and to concentrate the player on the game. At the same time, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a safe one that is unlikely to be injured even if he touches it at a glance, and to make the player feel at ease, thereby making him feel more interested in the game. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion is formed in a half-doughnut shape, when the entire first decorative portion is illuminated by the decoration light-emitting means according to the game state, it emits light like an annular fluorescent lamp. The decoration can be displayed to the player and can attract the player's attention. When the luminous decoration is made, for example, if the luminous decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the luminous effect as if the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It is possible to surprise the player and make him think that something good will happen, heighten the expectation for the game, and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Means 5: In the configuration of Means 4,
"The said decoration is
It is arranged below the first decorative portion so that the front end is positioned rearward of the first decorative portion, and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward with a semi-circular cross-sectional shape. A second decorative part is further provided."

According to the configuration of means 5, the decoration body is arranged below the first decoration part so that the front end thereof is positioned rearward of the first decoration part, and bulges outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape. It further comprises a second decorative portion extending in a semi-annular shape.

As a result, the first decorative part and the second decorative part make it possible for the player to see the decoration as if half-doughnuts are arranged vertically, and the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage plate can be improved. In addition, since the tip of the second decorative part is located behind the tip of the first decorative part, the perspective can be emphasized by the second decorative part to make the decoration appear larger, and the player can enjoy it. It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration part and the second decoration part are arranged vertically, each of them is appropriately illuminated by the decoration body light emitting means, thereby producing a light emission effect such as rotating light, It is possible to show a player a light emitting performance in which light moves up and down, to amuse the player, and to show a variety of light emitting performances to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
It is characterized by ``further comprising a performance operation unit attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the decoration and capable of accepting the operation of the player according to the game state''. do.

Here, the ``effect operation part'' includes a ``rotation operation part capable of rotation operation'', a ``press operation part capable of pressing operation'', a ``touch operation part capable of touch operation'', and a ``slide operation part capable of slide operation''. , a “stick operation unit capable of stick operation”, a “composite operation unit capable of rotating operation and pressing operation”, and the like. Further, the "drawing operation section" may be in contact with the upper surface of the decoration, or may protrude from the upper surface of the decoration.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the game machine is further provided with a performance operating section attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and capable of accepting the player's operation according to the game state. be.

As a result, since the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, when the operation of the effect operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player can By operating the performance operation unit, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, by lighting up the decoration with the decoration lighting means, the player's interest can be attracted to the decoration attached to the production operation unit, so that the player who operates the production operation unit can When the participatory performance is executed, the decorative body is decorated with light, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (performance operation part) and the operation of the performance operation part can be urged, and the player can perform the performance operation. By operating the part, it is possible to entertain the player's participatory performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation section is attached behind the front end of the decoration, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, or the like from coming into contact with the effect operation section due to the decoration. The erroneous operation of the performance operation part can be reduced, and the player's participatory performance for operating the performance operation part can be surely entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect operation part is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation part looks large and gives a strong impact to the player. At the same time, the game progresses (for example, game media (game ball ), the start of rotation of the rotatable body by inserting a game medium (medal), etc.), it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect operation part is provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decoration body, the decoration body decorates the outside of the effect operation part, so that the appearance of the effect operation part can be improved. , the performance operation part can be conspicuous, and the game machine can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Means 7: In the configuration of Means 6,
"The production operation unit
an annular rotating operation unit that can be rotated by a player;
and a pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player within the ring of the rotating operation portion.

Here, the ``rotation operation part'' includes ``a part that can be rotated not only by a player's rotation operation but also by driving a motor'', and ``a part that can be rotated only by a player's rotation operation''.

Further, the ``pressing operation part'' includes a ``cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part along the inner circumference of the rotary operating part, and a cylindrical central pressing operation part provided in the outer peripheral pressing operation part. , ``single cylinder shape'', ``equipped with a cross key or an arrow key'', and the like. Furthermore, the ``pressing operation part'' includes ``a device that can move back and forth in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the protruding position,'' and ``a device that cannot move in the vertical direction.''

According to the configuration of the means 7, the effect operation unit is provided with an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player within the ring of the rotation operation unit. It is what I did.

As a result, since the rotation operation section capable of rotating operation and the pressing operation section capable of pressing operation are provided as the production operation section, in the player participation type production in which the operation of the production operation section can be accepted, the rotation operation Since it is possible for the player to operate by appropriately combining and pressing operations, it is possible to respond to effects that require more complicated input (player's operation), so that more diverse player participation type effects can be played. The game can be presented to a player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less bored, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the decoration having the rotating operation part and the pressing operation part attached to the upper surface can be illuminated by the decoration lighting means, the decoration is illuminated when the player participatory performance is executed. As a result, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the decorative body (the effect operation part such as the rotation operation part and the pressing operation part) and prompt the player to operate the effect operation part. A decrease in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the player participation type presentation. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation part or to press the pressing operation part according to the lighting mode of the decorative body. The operation part can be accurately operated, and the player's participatory performance can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, it is desirable that the diameter of the rotary operation part is larger than the distance of the storage plate in the front-rear direction. As a result, the front end side of the rotary operation part protrudes farther forward than the storage dish, so that the rotary operation part can be greatly conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to make the game machine recognize that it is different from other game machines, and to make it easy for the game machine to be selected as the game machine to play. In addition, when the diameter of the rotary operation part is increased, the player can immediately recognize that the rotary operation part is for rotating operation, and when the player participation type production is executed, the game can be played. It is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the performance, to increase the expectation for the execution of the player participation type performance, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. Further, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the annular rotary operation portion is increased, the inner diameter of the rotary operation portion can be increased to increase the size of the pressing operation portion in the ring. It is possible to make the depressing operation of the depressing operation part fun and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Means 8: In the configuration of Means 7,
"The pressing operation part
It is movable between a retreat position projecting slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotary operation part and a projecting position projecting upward from the retreat position according to the game state. It is characterized by

Here, the ``pressing operation part'' that can move between the retracted position and the projecting position includes ``thing that can be moved to the retracting position when the player presses it when it is in the projecting position'', and ``when the player is in the projecting position, , which cannot be moved to the retracted position even if it is pressed.

According to the configuration of the means 8, the pressing operation part is moved between the retracted position slightly projecting upward from the upper surface of the rotating operation part and the projecting position projecting upward from the retracted position according to the game state. , is movable.

As a result, when the pressing operation part is moved to the protruding position according to the game state, the pressing operation part protrudes upward from the rotating operation part, so that the upper surface of the decorative body becomes large together with the rotating operation part. Since it is in a state as if it bulges upward, it is possible to make the surroundings of the ornaments appear larger and give a strong impact to the players, and to make the ornaments more conspicuous and to enhance the appeal to the players more than other game machines. At the same time, since the pressing operation part protrudes greatly upward, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation part, and the player's expectation for the operation of the pressing operation part can be heightened to suppress the decrease in interest. be able to.

In addition, since the pressing operation part is movable between the retracted position and the projecting position, the player's attention can be directed to the rotating operation part at the retracted position, and the player's interest can be directed to the rotating operation part at the projecting position. Since the pressing operation part can be directed to the pressing operation part, by moving the pressing operation part according to the content of the player participation type performance to be executed, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation part, and the game can be played. The player can be made to operate the rotary operation part and the pressing operation part accurately to enjoy the player-participation type presentation.

Means 9: In the configuration of Means 8,
"The pressing operation part
a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion that can be pressed by a player when in the projecting position;
It is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation part, and has a cylindrical central pressing operation part that can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruded position. characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation part includes a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part that can be pressed by the player when in the protruding position, and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operating part that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation part, and is arranged in the retracted position and the protruding position. and a cylindrical central pressing portion that can be pressed by the player at any position.

As a result, on the upper surface of the decoration that protrudes greatly forward, the peripheral pressing operation part and the rotating operation part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. To strongly attract a player's interest, to heighten the player's sense of expectation for a player-participation type performance in which each operation part is operated, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest. can be done. In addition, by decorating the decorative body with light, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the decorative body, and furthermore, to the rotary operation part, the outer peripheral pressing operation part, and the central pressing operation part, and to encourage the operation thereof. A decrease in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the player participation type presentation.

Further, when the pressing operation portion inside the rotating operation portion is set to the retracted position, the central pressing operation portion, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and the rotating operating portion have the same height, and the rotating operating portion and the central pressing operation portion are at the same height. becomes operable and the pressing operation portion is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position, the central pressing operation portion and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion project upward from the rotating operation portion, and the central pressing operation portion, The peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operation part become operable. Therefore, according to the contents of the player-participation type performance, the operation part that the player can operate can be appropriately used properly, and more various performances can be handled, and the player can enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation part is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part can be seen, so that the player can have the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation part can be rotated. can. As a result, even if a player who is under the illusion tries to rotate the outer circumference pressing operation part when the player participation type performance for operating the rotation operation part and the pressing operation part is executed, the outer circumference pressing operation part does not rotate, so that the game is played. The player can be impatient, and the flow of performance can be given a sense of tension to entertain the player.

Means 10: In the configuration of any one of Means 6 to 9,
It is characterized by ``further comprising an operation part light-emitting means for lighting and decorating the effect operation part in accordance with the game state.''

Here, the "operation unit light emitting means" includes "full color LED", "single color LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", "cold cathode tube", and the like. are mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine is further provided with an operation part light-emitting means for making the performance operation part light-emitting and decorated in accordance with the game state.

As a result, the effect operation part can be illuminated by the operation part light emitting means according to the game state. The whole bulging part bulging forward under the door window can be decorated with luminescence, the bulging part can be made conspicuous to strongly attract the player's interest, and the whole can be decorated with luminescence. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the production operation section by lighting the production operation section with the operation section light emitting means, the player participation type production that operates the production operation section is executed. At times, by decorating the production operation part with light, the player's attention can be directed to the production operation part and the operation can be encouraged, and the player can enjoy the player participation type production by making the player operate the production operation part. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Means 11: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played,
a body frame detachably holding the game board from the front;
a door frame base that closes the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable, and has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front;
a bulging portion that bulges forward from a portion of the front surface of the door frame base below the door window, and includes a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game in the game area; ,
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward with a semi-circular cross-sectional shape, and the front end thereof is forward of the front end of the storage tray and the door frame. a first decorative portion protruding forward from the front surface of the base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base; a decorative body provided with a second decorative portion arranged below the first decorative portion and extending in a semi-annular shape so as to have a semi-arc cross-sectional shape and bulge outward;
a decoration light-emitting means that causes the decoration to emit light according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area;
A ring-shaped rotary operation portion attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the ornament and capable of being rotated by the player, and an upper surface of the rotary operation portion within the ring of the rotary operation portion according to the game state. The cylinder is movable between a retracted position slightly projecting upward from the retracted position and a projecting position projecting upwardly from the retracted position, and the player can press the cylinder at the projecting position. and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion which is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruding position. an effect operation unit including a pressing operation unit and capable of receiving an operation by a player according to the game state;
and an operation part light emitting means for lighting and decorating the production operation part according to the game state.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine has a game board having a game area in which a game is played, a body frame detachably holding the game board from the front, and a front side of the body frame that can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and the part below the door window on the front of the door frame base bulges forward. A bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game within the area, and a bulging portion attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction and bulging outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape. The front end of the door frame base protrudes forward from the front end of the storage tray to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base. and a decorative portion, which is arranged below the first decorative portion such that the front end thereof is positioned rearwardly of the first decorative portion, and extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape. a decorative body having a second decorative portion that is attached to the decorative body; a decorative body light-emitting means that causes the decorative body to emit light according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area; A ring-shaped rotary operation part which is attached to the rear and can be rotated by the player, and a retracted position which slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotary operation part in the ring of the rotary operation part according to the game state and a protruding position protruding upward from the retracted position. It is provided with a push operation part consisting of a cylindrical central push operation part that is arranged in the cylinder and can be pushed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruded position, and the player can press the push operation part according to the game state. This game machine is provided with a performance operation part that can accept an operation and an operation part light-emitting means that lights and decorates the performance operation part in accordance with the game state.

As a result, a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward at a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that opens and closes the main body frame. a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base and having a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base; A central pressing operation portion, an outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and a rotating operation portion are arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the . As a result, when this game machine is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the decorative body with the effect operation part attached to the upper surface protrudes greatly forward below the door window through which the inside of the game area can be seen. The decoration can be made more conspicuous than other game machines, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the game machine can be selected as the game machine to play. can be made easier. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body protrudes greatly forward under the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage dish, and the length of the decorative body in the horizontal direction can be made longer than before. can be longer. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his or her hand on the storage plate, it is possible to reduce the part of the decorative body that is hidden by the player's hand. To make it easy for a player to notice the luminous decoration of the decorative body when the luminous decoration is made by the decorative body luminous means, to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be made

In addition, since the ornament is projected forward greatly below the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the ornament is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, depending on the game state, when the decoration body is light-embellished by the light-emitting means for light-emitting the decoration body, or when the light-emitting operation section is light-embellished by the light-emitting means for the operating section, the light illuminates the player from below. A player's line of sight can be directed to the downward decoration body and the performance operation part by the luminous decoration of the decoration body and the performance operation part, and by making the player's line of sight look downward, the game provided in front of the player can be played. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area by keeping the inside of the area away from the player's field of vision. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, and when the variable winning opening (second start opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening, etc.) opens and closes , etc., the player is directed downward in the game area by decorating the decorative body and the effect operation unit with light emission, and after that, when the player returns the line of sight to the game area, the effect image and the movable body are displayed. etc., can surprise the player and give a strong impact, amuse the player, and make the player think that something good will happen. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration body can be illuminated according to the game state to attract the player's attention, and the player can be surprised by changing the performance in the game area during that time. can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state (“jackpot game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the luminous decoration is applied to the decorative body. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the ornaments are projected greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire ornaments, the player moves away from the game machine, so that the entire game machine including the game area can be easily seen. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the game has been put aside for a while, and the player can be relaxed to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, thereby appealing to the player. This game machine can be made easy to select as a game machine for playing with an increased . In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to make it easier for the player to extend both hands forward. ) and the handling of the game media stored in the storage tray can be facilitated, and the player is less likely to be stressed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the first and second decorative parts arranged above and below the decorative body are formed so that the semicircular cross section extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward. To give a smooth and soft impression to a player and to make the player play the game in a calm mood because the donut has a form in which half of the tube-shaped donut projects forward. It is possible to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest, and at the same time, the player can recognize that it is a safe product that is unlikely to be injured even if it touches at a glance, By making the player feel at ease, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, by luminous decoration of the decoration body and the effect operation part attached to the upper surface of the decoration body, the whole bulging part bulging forward below the door window can be luminous decoration. Therefore, it is possible to make the bulging portion stand out and strongly attract the player's interest, and the whole luminous decoration can make the player think that something good is going to happen. A player's interest can be directed to the performance operation part to prompt the operation, and by making the player operate the performance operation part, the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are semi-doughnut-shaped, when the entire first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are illuminated and decorated by the decoration body light emitting means according to the game state, , the luminous decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the luminous decoration is made, for example, if the luminous decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the luminous effect as if the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It is possible to surprise and make one think that something good is happening, and at the same time, the rotation operation part attached to the upper surface of the decoration can be rotated in the direction in which the light of the first decoration part and the second decoration part is rotated. The player can be urged to rotate in the same direction as . Alternatively, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion, which are arranged vertically, are alternately decorated to emit light, so that the player can see a lighting effect in which the light moves up and down, and at the same time, the light is vertically moved. The moving light can prompt the player to press the peripheral pressing portion or the central pressing portion. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotary operation part or press the pressing operation part by appropriately lighting the first decoration part and the second decoration part. The rotation operation part or the pressing operation part can be operated accurately against the player, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotating operation portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. Thus, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, to increase the player's expectation for the player-participation type performance in which each operation part is operated, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest. can.

Further, when the pressing operation portion inside the rotating operation portion is set to the retracted position, the central pressing operation portion, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and the rotating operating portion have the same height, and the rotating operating portion and the central pressing operation portion have the same height. becomes operable and the pressing operation portion is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation portion and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion protrude upward from the rotating operation portion, and the central pressing operation portion, The peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operation part become operable. Therefore, according to the content of the player-participation type performance, the operation part that can be operated by the player can be properly used properly, and more various performances can be handled, and the player can enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, when the pressing operation part is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part can be seen, so that the player may have the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation part can be rotated. can. As a result, even if a player who is under the illusion tries to rotate the outer periphery pressing operation part when the player participatory performance for operating the rotating operation part or the pressing operation part is executed, the outer periphery pressing operation part does not rotate, so that the game is played. The player can be impatient, and the flow of performance can be given a sense of tension to entertain the player.

Means 12: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 11,
The game machine is
a plurality of receiving ports arranged in the game area and capable of receiving game media;
A pachinko machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of game media into the receiving slot.

Here, the ``acceptance opening'' includes a ``general prize winning opening that is always open within the game area'', and a ``advantageous game state that is always open within the game area and gives an advantage to the player by accepting game media.'' A start prize winning opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether to generate a Acceptable variable winning gates (variable starting gates, prize winning gates, etc.)”, “Normal lottery drawn by game media passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area Depending on the result, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept game media, "a specific area within the game area (e.g., gate, chucker, etc.) Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game medium, it is possible to accept the game medium, and a variable start is performed to perform a special lottery as to whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous due to the acceptance of the game medium. Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium received in the accessory winning opening is sorted and received by the distribution means", " Advantageous gaming states in which the player is advantageous include a "big prize winning opening and a prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media".

In addition, the ``pachinko machine'' includes ``lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting game media into the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. A special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result drawn by the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols after variably displaying the special symbols in response to the display, and displaying an advantageous game state in the special lottery result display means. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a large winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), A distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning port, the prize winning port is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to give an advantage to the player. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (so-called Hanemono machine)", "has a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is drawn by receiving game media into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium received in the special prize winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. (a so-called multi-function machine) having advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing in a pattern of .

According to the configuration of the means 12, the game machine comprises a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of receiving ports which are arranged in the game area and are capable of receiving the game medium, and a game machine into the receiving port. and a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the receipt of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

It is desirable that the lighting decoration of the decoration by the decoration lighting means is executed when the game medium driven into the game area is received by the receiving slot. As a result, when the game media are received in the receiving port, a predetermined number of game media are paid out and the decorative body is decorated with light, so that the player can be entertained by hitting the game media aimed at the receiving port. can be made easier to continue, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium into the starting port, and the result of the special lottery is presented to the player when suggesting the result of the lottery to the player. As one of the effects, the decoration may be decorated with light by the decoration lighting means. As a result, since the decorative body is luminous decoration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player with the above-mentioned effect, so that the special lottery result drawn for the player It is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state will occur (for example, a "jackpot"), raise expectations for the occurrence of the advantageous game state, and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, as described above, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect by decorating the decorative body with light, so the effect (for example, It can be suitably used for a ready-to-win effect), and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 11,
The game machine is
a plurality of hull bodies each having a plurality of graphics;
a starting operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted;
a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation parts respectively. characterized by being

Here, the ``slot machine'' includes ``a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining a combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game'', and ``a slot machine with a An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and benefits that are advantageous to the player are given according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the internal lottery drawn. It is done", etc. In addition, as "privileges", "big bonus (BB)", "regular bonus (RB)", "cherry rush bonus (CRB)", "replay", "long replay time (LRT)", "assist time ( AT)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 13, the gaming machine comprises a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of patterns, and a starting operation section that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted. and a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and the stop symbols by all the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operating parts. and a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

The luminous decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means is performed when the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols (so-called reach). Furthermore, as one of the effects presented to the player, a plurality of ornaments may be rotated by driving means. As a result, the decorative body is decorated with light, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation section can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative body may be luminous decoration. When the combination of specific symbols is stopped, the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state (for example, "BB") will occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be heightened. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest. In addition, as described above, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect by decorating the decorative body with light. It can be used to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

Means 14: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 11,
The game machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, a "combined machine" that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine means that after inserting a plurality of game media, a pattern row consisting of a plurality of patterns according to the operation of a start operation part (for example, an operation lever) is variably displayed, and after that, the variation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (eg, stop button), and game media are paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, or benefits advantageous to the player (eg , advantageous game state). It should be noted that if the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined period of time has passed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped in response to the passage of the predetermined period of time.

According to the configuration of means 14, the game machine is a hybrid machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. As a result, any one of the effects of the above-described means can be achieved in a hybrid machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined.

The luminous decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means is performed when the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, the decoration may be decorated with light by the decoration light emitting means, or the decoration may be decorated with light when the internal lottery result is a winning hand. , and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[effect]
As described above, according to the above technical means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to the player and that can suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game by means of the luminous decoration.

[Relationship between the above-mentioned form and the above-mentioned technical means]
The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 in this embodiment is the bulging part of the present invention, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 in this embodiment are the storage trays of the present invention, and the production operation section cover unit in the production operation unit 300 of this embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of 310 are the decorative body of the present invention, the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is the first decorative portion of the present invention, and the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment. The plate center lower decoration 312b is the second decoration part of the present invention, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 in the present embodiment are the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention, and the production operation ring decoration in this embodiment The substrate 352, the central button decoration substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 correspond to the operating section light emitting means of the present invention.

[Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed in the portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 closing the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. A tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 that can be stored bulges forward, and the front end of the tray unit 200 is about half the width of the door frame base 101. A production operation section cover unit 310 protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101 is provided, and a central pressing operation section 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation section are arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the production operation section cover unit 310. 303 b , and a rotary operation unit 302 . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation part cover unit 310 having the effect operation part 301 attached to the upper surface is installed below the door window 101a through which the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized. Since the plate unit 200 (performance operation part cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, it can strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the production operation part cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is largely projected forward below the door frame 3, the production operation part cover unit 310 can be moved forward from the front end of the upper tray 201.例文帳に追加In addition, the length of the effect operation section cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his/her hand on the upper plate 201, the parts of the whole performance operation part cover unit 310 that are hidden by the player's hand are reduced. Therefore, when the effect operation section cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-emitting decorated by the plate center upper decorative board 314 and the plate center lower decorative board 316, the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312 is given to the player. It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice this, to avoid the player from feeling lost, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect operation section cover unit 310 is largely protruded forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is opened. is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 can be light-emitting-decorated by the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 according to the game state, or the effect operation can be performed. When the effect operation section 301 is decorated with light emission by the ring decoration board 352, the central button decoration board 376, and the peripheral button decoration board 377, the light illuminates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation section 301 are illuminated. , the player's line of sight can be directed toward the lower unit front cover 312 and the effect operation section 301, and by directing the player's line of sight downward, the game area 5a provided in the front can be turned. can be kept away from the player's field of view to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 open and close, etc. Furthermore, by decorating the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation part 301 with light emission, the player is directed downward in the game area 5a. By changing the body, etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, amuse the player, and make the player think that something good will happen. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the unit front cover 312 is decorated with light according to the game state to attract the player's attention, and the effect in the game area 5a can be changed to surprise the player. , the luminous decoration of the unit front cover 312 can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state (“jackpot game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, a premium feeling can be given to the luminous decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is decorated with luminescence, thereby making the player happy. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the unit front cover 312 protrudes greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, the player looks away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire gaming machine including the game area can be seen. becomes easier to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the game has been put aside for a while, and the player can be relaxed to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since the effect operation part cover unit 310 projecting greatly forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation part cover unit 310 is emphasized and the player's interest is strongly attracted. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by increasing the appeal to the player. In addition, since the effect operation section cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a. It is possible to easily operate the handle 182 for the purpose and to handle the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201, thereby making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 are arranged so that the semicircular cross section bulges outward. Since it extends in a semicircular shape, half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so that it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression. It is possible to make the player play the game in a calm mood, to make the player concentrate on the game and to suppress the decline in interest, and to prevent the player from being injured even if the player touches it at first glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is safe, and to make the player feel at ease, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the plate unit 200 bulging forward below the door window 101a is provided by simultaneously decorating the performance operation part cover unit 310 and the performance operation part 301 protruding from the upper surface of the performance operation part cover unit 310 with light. Since the whole can be luminous decoration, the dish unit 200 can be conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the whole luminous decoration does not bring any good to the player. At the same time, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the performance operation unit 301 to prompt the operation, and by making the player operate the performance operation unit 301, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance and enjoy it. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b are formed in a half-doughnut shape, the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 and the plate center lower decoration substrate 316 are formed in accordance with the game state. When the entire decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are light-emitting, the player can see the light-emitting decoration like an annular fluorescent lamp, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the luminous decoration is made, for example, if the luminous decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the luminous effect as if the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It can surprise you and make you think that something good is going to happen. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction that the light at 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, which are arranged vertically, are alternately decorated with light, so that the player can see a lighting effect in which light moves up and down. At the same time, the vertically moving light can prompt the player to press the peripheral pressing portion 303b or the central pressing portion 303a. Therefore, the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are appropriately illuminated to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 or press the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, the player can be caused to operate the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 accurately, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 extends forward from the side of the door window 101a (outside of the right side). A side window in which three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of a side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction on a flat plate-shaped door frame right side unit 410. 410a is formed, and in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the decoration portion 410b. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. After that, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. , the game can be played in the game area 5a, the player can enjoy the game, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加

At this time, in the door frame 3, the left side of which is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 by the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126, the door window 101a Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outer side far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b are visible. can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, making it difficult for other players to see By making it difficult to receive the feeling, other players can play without worrying about it. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and changes to a predetermined game state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 cause the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light, and the side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light. Visibility through the side window 410a is changed by making the inside 410a bright. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light can be emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, making the side window interior decoration portions 410b dazzling and making it difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from between them. At the same time, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight to the side window interior decoration part 410b by the light emission of the side window interior decoration part 410b, so that the player's interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a is diminished and the side window is viewed. Visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to look into the inside of the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

More specifically, when the game state is such that, for example, the player is in a game state (scene) that suggests the arrival of an advantageous chance, the three side window inner decorative portions 410b are caused to emit light, and the glare of the side window interior decoration portions 410b causes the side windows to emit light. Reduce visibility through window 410a. This makes it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the other players pay attention to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Because it is possible to avoid this, other players are worried about being noticed and can not concentrate on the game, so they feel uncomfortable, and they feel that they have lost money because they are induced to make mistakes. can be prevented, the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Therefore, when the player is in a game state such as when a chance arrives, other players can be prevented from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a. It is possible to entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

In addition, since the three side window interior decorative portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction in the side window 410a, the angle of viewing the side window 410a from the side changes. However, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b do not appear to overlap each other, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b are not illuminated, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the side window 410a can be viewed on the opposite side. (within the game area 5a), and a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without it.

In addition, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged with an interval in the vertical direction, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b of a certain height are illuminated, a portion of the same height in the game area 5a is displayed. can be made difficult for other players to see through the side window 410a. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction within the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, when the player is in a game state such as when a chance arrives, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a. It is possible to entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending long forward is provided with the side window 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decorative portions 410b are turned off to open the side window 410a. In a state in which the visibility through the pachinko machine 1 is secured, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the island equipment can be seen without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to easily discover that a fraudulent act is being performed in the game area 5a from the end of the game hall, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside of the left and right sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, which is farther from the left side of the door frame 4 that is rotatably attached to the main frame 4. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the body frame 4.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened to carry out work such as maintenance or replacement of the game board 5, the door frame 3 can be prevented from becoming a hindrance by opening the door frame 3 wide, thereby preventing deterioration of workability. can do.

In addition, since the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are made to emit light according to the game state, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called The side window interior decorative portion 410b may be illuminated or extinguished depending on the expected value). More specifically, for example, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win developing effect, etc., when the expected value is low, the decorative portion 410b inside the side window is illuminated to make it difficult for other players to look into the game, thereby generating an advantageous game state. When the game is not played (when "losing"), an awkward atmosphere with other players can be avoided, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the side window interior decoration part 410b is not illuminated or extinguished, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state ("big win") even in a state where it is easy for other players to peep. ), it is possible to suppress the decline in interest without creating an awkward atmosphere, and to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, thereby increasing the interest in the game of the player. It can make the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player is advantageous occurs (so-called (expected value), the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, from top to bottom, from the center to both upper and lower sides, etc.), or among the three side window interior decoration portions 410b. A specific side window interior decoration portion 410b may be made to emit light. More specifically, for example, during the execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., the higher the expected value, the more the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are caused to emit light in order from the bottom or in order from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to peek at the game, to suggest an expected value, to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

The three side window interior decoration portions 410b as described above emit light (lighting) and light off, and there are also differences in flashing patterns, light emission colors, and changes in light emission colors (for example, from cold blue to hot). It may be a change to a feeling of red, a change to blue-yellow-red like a traffic signal, etc.), or a change in brightness (luminance), etc., and the same effects as above can be achieved. The decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration parts 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to strongly attract the attention of the players.

For this reason, conversely, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-reach developing effect, etc., the presence or absence of light emission of the three side window inner decorative portions 410b, the light emission mode such as the light emission pattern, etc., is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Since it is possible to suggest the degree (expected value) of the possibility of occurrence of the - It is possible to make the player's heart beat faster, heighten the player's sense of expectation, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the three side window interior decoration parts 410b may be arbitrarily turned on or off by operating the effect operation part 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3. . As a result, for example, in the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win developing effect, etc., when the probability of occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player is advantageous (so-called expected value) is low, the effect operation is performed. By operating the part 301 to make the side window interior decoration part 410b emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from peeking at it, so when an advantageous game state does not occur (when "losing") In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling embarrassed by being watched by other players, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous game state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated so that the side window interior decoration part 410b does not emit light. (or turn off the side window interior decoration part 410b), even if other players look into the game, an advantageous game state is generated, so that an awkward atmosphere is not created and interest is reduced. In addition to being able to suppress the other players, it is possible to create an atmosphere as if the other players are cheering for each other, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game and making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, by operating the effect operation unit 301, it may be possible to set the timing, light emission mode, etc., for the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light. As a result, in the preset default state, since the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be peeped by other players is not set, some players feel uncomfortable with being peeped at, and are interested in the game. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the effect operation unit 301, the above-described effects can be reliably achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be increased. A decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable and the ball removal path is opened. When the 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is disabled by the ball removal movable piece 592 to flow into the ball removal passage 580b. Subsequently, it flows downstream of the dispensing passage 580a and can be sent to the dispensing blade 589 via the dispensing passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted (unlocked) to put the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a rotatable state (second state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from upstream moves to the payout passage. Without flowing to the downstream side of 580a, it passes over the ball removing movable piece 592 and flows to the ball removing passage 580b, and can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility side through the ball removing passage 580b. can. Since the pay-out vane 589 is provided on the downstream side of the pay-out passage 580a, in a normal state, the ball take-out lever 593 prevents the ball take-out movable piece 592 from rotating (first state). , on the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a string of beads.

When the payout vane 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout vane 589 flows downstream, and the game ball B is guided toward the payout vane 589 side by the ball extraction movable piece 592. Since the game ball B is paid out one by one at the payout blade 589, the flow speed of the game ball B on the upstream side from the payout blade 589 becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B hits. The force acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592 due to contact is relatively weak, and the opposite side of the ball extraction movable piece 592 to the part that contacts the game ball B is near the center of the ball extraction passage 580b. is not caught between the wall surface of the ball extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball extraction movable piece 592 is not damaged. As a result, it is possible to reduce damage to the movable ball piece 592 during the game, so that the game is interrupted due to the damage to the movable ball piece 592 and the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a during replacement or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5), the ball removal lever 593 is lifted so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, flows down to the ball extraction passage 580b side beyond the ball extraction movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly. In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 . For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the left side of the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be opened and closed around the axis extending vertically. The body frame 4 attached to is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 on the left side of the body frame 4 (axis center) When the door frame 3 attached to be openable and closable (rotatable by the hinge) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend parallel to each other. A connection that connects the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. on the frame 4 side, and the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, etc. on the door frame 3 side. The cable 503 extends toward the axial center from a portion away from the axis of the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. After being held by the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame 3 and the rear surface of the door frame 3, the cable guide member 502 further extends to the vicinity of the axis, then folds back and extends in the direction away from the axis, and the door It is held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the frame 3, and then connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. It is connected.

Then, when the door frame 3 closing (closed) the front side of the body frame 4 is hinge-rotated around the axis on the left side so as to be opened from the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is opened to the body. Since the portion of the connection cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves away from the main body frame 4 as it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, As the connection cable 503 is deformed, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates (turns) around the mounting shaft 502 c away from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is tilted with respect to the front surface of the body frame 4 . In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 near the axial center protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Since the connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are unlikely to become an obstacle.

In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends from the rotatably attached mounting shaft 502c toward the shaft core, the base end of the guide member can be extended like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the folding back portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the door frame upper hinge pin 122 for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, and the folded back portion of the connection cable 503 can be set to a position where it is difficult to get in the way.

On the other hand, when closing the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves closer to the front surface of the body frame 4. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 moves in the opposite direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 can be moved without being caught between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. can be closed. Therefore, when performing maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, and the maintenance can be performed smoothly, and the maintenance can be interrupted for maintenance. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the game being played, and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the connection cable 503, which extends from the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core and then is folded back and extends in a direction away from the shaft core, is placed at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axis. Since the tangent line passing through the center of the mounting shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is less than or equal to the angle at which it intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3, the longitudinal axis along which the connection cable guide member 502 extends to the posterior surface of the . Further, on the side of the door frame 3 , the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 , so that the door frame 3, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side.

For these reasons, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state. It is possible to prevent troubles such as disconnection of the connection cable 503 due to contact of the tip of the member 502 with the door frame 3 . Therefore, when a problem occurs during the game that maintenance must be performed by opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work, and maintenance can be performed. The game can be played smoothly, the increase in the game interruption time can be reduced, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the crease. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Also, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (closer to the axis than the cable holder 103a) ), and can press the connection cable 503 toward the body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by abutting it (a position closer to the axis center than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103). a portion projecting rearward on the side). As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Also, a tangent line that passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and is in contact with a circle centered on the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and passes through the pressing portion, and the front surface of the main body frame 4. The crossing angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less. 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the frame pieces 502b are provided on the two long sides of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat plate-shaped guide body 502a is increased, making it difficult to bend. In addition, the connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, so that the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized reliably.

Further, as described above, since the connection cable guide member 502 has increased rigidity, even if the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 made up of many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more electric wires can be guided. Therefore, the electrical connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be concentrated in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

In addition, with the connection cable 503 placed between the pair of frame pieces 502b of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 is passed through the through-holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503 and connected to the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 can be easily performed. be able to. In addition, by holding the connection cable 503 with the binding band 504 passed through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off the guide member 502. The connection cable 503 can be held securely, and the connection cable 503 is removed from the connection cable guide member 502 so that the connection cable 503 is not caught between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed. It is possible to avoid the above-described operation and effect.

Further, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is moved to the outer frame lower side constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylindrical portion 43a. Since the space between the port member 47 and the connecting tube portion 43a in the assembly 40 (the inner space 40a of the curtain plate) is communicated with the main body frame speaker by the space inside the speaker unit 620a and the space on the side of the outer frame 2. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of the 622 can be sufficiently secured, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the player is entertained by the sound of the heavy bass sound, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. can be done. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment recess 501h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume inside the speaker unit 620a is reduced, the main body frame speaker 622 can output deep bass sound. Therefore, the body frame 4 can be provided with the cable attachment recess 501h recessed rearward below the body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached to the body frame 4 side to achieve the above-described effects. In addition, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is mounted inside the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward in the body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h, so that the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 can be prevented. The door frame 3 can be reliably closed by avoiding it.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame in the body frame 4 passes through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion opening 501b of the base 501 can be visually recognized from the front (player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is open near the right end in the longitudinal direction (lateral direction) of the front panel front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port member 47 is opened at the lower portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened in the vicinity of the left end on the side opposite to 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4, and the speaker unit 620a covering the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 ) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 . In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 are output from the speaker mounting portion of the speaker cover 621. 621a and the speaker port 211b of the door frame 3 are radiated to the player side. On the other hand, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting tubular portion 43a into the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. , and emitted forward from the port member 47 toward the player side. At this time, since the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is composed of the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the enclosure 624 The volume can be increased as much as possible, and a sound with extended bass range can be output forward from the body frame speaker 622 . In addition, since the connection tube portion 43a of the panel rear member 43 of the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) of the frame, the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) are connected to the enclosure 624. ) in the depth direction (front-rear direction) can be made larger than before, the widths in the front-rear direction of the connection tube portion 43a and the connection portion 621c are increased, and the interior of the speaker unit 620a Attenuation of sound from the space toward the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Furthermore, since the port member 47 is cylindrical on the side of the outer frame 2, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the low frequency range can be amplified and the phase can be reversed. 47 can output a sound in which the bass is amplified. The sound forwardly output from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound forwardly output from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are combined to increase the volume. , the player can be made to listen to richer bass sounds, and the player can be entertained with sounds such as voices, music, sound effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the port member 47 inverts the phase of the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 and radiates it forward (constituting a so-called bass reflex speaker). When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 overlaps the sound output forward from the port member 47, the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases because the phases are the same. Compared to using a passive radiator, it is possible to increase the sound output with a simple configuration.

Furthermore, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion slot 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical dimension of them can be increased. enclosure 624 can be increased in volume. More specifically, in general, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the eyes of the player is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which games are played is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, since it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the outer frame lower assembly 40 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion opening 501b in the main body frame 4 Therefore, by increasing the vertical dimensions of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a sound with a richer bass tone, to entertain the player with the sound, and to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Further, since the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, simply by closing the body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c are brought into contact with each other. In addition, since sliding resistance is not generated between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, the opening and closing operation of the body frame 4 does not become heavy. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in workability during maintenance or the like.

Furthermore, since the seal member 48 seals the space between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the effects described above.

In addition, since part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board is relatively small. The game board 5 with a wider game area 5a can be provided by enlarging the insertion opening 501b, and the wide game area 5a can entertain the players more, and the wide game area 5a can be opened through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by being visible, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the horizontal direction, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Therefore, since the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are separated from each other by the outer frame. 2 (pachinko machine 1) at a certain distance in front of it, they interfere with each other. You can hear rich bass sound.

In addition, as described above, since the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 to the front is amplified by interference near the player, other players far from the pachinko machine 1 The player will receive unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound suggesting the arrival of a chance is output, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 hears a sound with a high volume and a rich bass sound, thereby heightening expectations for the game. can be made On the other hand, since it is difficult for players playing other pachinko machines to hear the sound from the pachinko machine 1, it is difficult for them to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 suggests the arrival of a chance. This makes it possible to reduce other players' peeking into the pachinko machine 1, and the peeping makes the players playing with the pachinko machine 1 feel uncomfortable and reduces their interest. can be suppressed.

Further, since the position of the connecting tube portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set at the center of the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the side of the body frame 4 connected to the connecting tube portion 43a Since the connection portion 621c of the main body frame 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the body frame 4, another member is arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a across the center in the horizontal direction, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by means of other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the attention of the players.

Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction in between, the game ball B is discharged to the outside in the space. A base unit 620b equipped with a ball ejection guiding portion 627, a discharged ball receiving portion 628, and the like, and a ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. , a power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with these reliably. .

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center pressing operation portion 303a protruding upward from the upper surface of the plate unit 200 protruding forward in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played. , an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operation portion 303a, and an annular rotating operating portion surrounding the outer periphery of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. 302 are arranged in an inclined state so that the front end side of the upper surface is lowered, so that the upper surfaces of the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are positioned so that the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 (Face) turns in a certain direction, and the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotating operation portion 302 are made easy to see, and the three large operation portions (pressing operation portions) arranged concentrically. 303 and the rotary operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, giving a strong impact to the player, and an operation that is clearly different from the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 distinguishable from other pachinko machines and strongly attract the player's interest. In addition, since the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotating operating portion 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the player operates the central pressing operating portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b, and the rotating operating portion 302 The expectation for the player participation type performance can be heightened, and the game is advanced so as to enter a game state in which the player participation type performance is executed (here, many game balls B are driven into the game area 5a. ), and when the player participatory type performance is executed, it is possible to make the player participate in the performance easily, so that the player can enjoy the player participatory type performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, depending on the game state, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are moved to a retracted position (lowered position) slightly protruding from the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 by an elevation mechanism including the operation button elevation drive motor 367 and the like. ) and a protruded position (raised position) that protrudes upward from the retracted position, and at the retracted position, the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 presses the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b. With the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b in the retracted position, the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b cannot be accepted. Therefore, the central depressing operation portion 303a can be reliably depressed, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, in the state of the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is in a state in which it cannot be pressed. Therefore, there is an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a when rotating the rotating operation portion 302, or rotating the rotating operation portion 302 when pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a. can be made difficult to occur, the player's participatory performance can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

By moving to the projecting position, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b protrude greatly upward on the upper surface of the plate unit 200. Therefore, the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be made conspicuous, and a strong impact can be given to the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that it is not possible. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to participate in the player-participation-type performance by pressing the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and the central pressing-operation part 303a, and it is possible to enjoy the player-participation type performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In this projecting position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b, and the rotation operating portion 302 are arranged concentrically. , when the central pressing operation portion 303a must be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are pressed, or When it is necessary to press the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, the central pressing operating portion 303a is pressed, or both the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b are pressed. The operating portion 302 may be rotated, or the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b may be pressed when the rotary operating portion 302 needs to be rotated. can be induced to press the As a result, when performing a pressing operation or a rotating operation, the player can perform the pressing operation or the rotating operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed and the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated. A sense of tension can be imparted to the pressing operation and the rotating operation, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participation type performance of performing the pressing operation and the rotating operation. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game of the player.

In addition, it is provided with notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and a performance display device 1600, and in a player participation type performance, the player can perform a central pressing operation in the state of the projecting position where the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is possible. If only the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b is pressed when the portion 303a should be pressed, the notification means notifies that the center pressing portion 303a will be pressed, and the pressing operation is restarted. The central pressing operation part 303a can be reliably pressed, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type performance. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling disgusted, and to make the player enjoy the player-participation-type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

Further, when the player believes that he/she is pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a correctly, the response (change) of the player-participation-type presentation despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a. is different from what is desired, and the player may be under the illusion that the center depressing operation section 303a is out of order, which may reduce interest in the game. On the other hand, as described above, since the error of the pressing operation is notified by the notification means, the player's assumption can be corrected, and the central pressing operation portion 303a is correctly pressed to allow the player to participate. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 for storing the game balls B for bulging forward and performing the game are located in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is played. , an annular rotating operation part 302 that is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically and that has an outer peripheral side surface, an upper surface, and an inner peripheral side exposed to the outside; A pressing operating portion 303 consisting of a central pressing operating portion 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b is arranged, and the rotary operating portion 302 is rotated according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a. Peripheral control board 1510 executes a player-participation-type effect in which rotation operation is performed or pressing operation portion 303 is pressed. Then, when the player participation type production is executed, the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, so that Since the effect changes, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed. When rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the player touches and operates any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside. Since it is possible to rotate by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when the rotation operation is performed by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface in one direction with the player's hand. can. Therefore, even when a player-participating effect is executed that requests the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate at high speed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above. The effect can be enjoyed for the player, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently operated to rotate, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early, and the rotation The player's participatory presentation in which the operation unit 302 is rotated can be continuously entertained, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or rotated with a light force, the player can be requested to perform various rotation operations, To make it possible to request a different rotation operation for each, to present a greater variety and variety of player-participation type performances to the player, to prevent the player from getting bored, and to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (consisting of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337) touched and rotated by the player is rotatably attached to the plate unit 200. Since the plate unit 200 protrudes in an arc outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) from the rotation base 332 that is attached to the plate unit 200, even if the rotation operation is performed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface, the plate unit 200 does not become an obstacle. , the rotary operation unit 302 can be easily rotated, and since the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated from a direction other than right beside the rotary operation unit 302 (perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easier to touch the outer peripheral side surface, the player can operate the rotating operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotating operation unit 302 when rotating the rotating operation unit 302 . Operability can be improved. Therefore, since the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated at a faster speed in the player participation type performance. , the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotary operation portion 302 is increased, compared with a rotary operation portion having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine, it is easier to perform a rotation operation at a minute rotation angle, and a rotation operation can be easily performed. Since it is possible to increase the movement of the player at the time of , it is possible to make the player feel that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation of 302 and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the rotary operation unit 302 is formed in a ring shape and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the upper surface can be rotated in addition to the outer peripheral side surface. Since it is possible to rotate by touching a portion according to the player's preference and situation, such as the inner peripheral side surface, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved. It is possible to make the audience participation type performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotary operation portion 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotary operation, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is provided in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302, the pressing operation portion 303 can be pressed. The operation part 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation are sufficiently enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest. can be made

Furthermore, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotary operation. The appearance of the portion 302 can be completely different from that of an automobile steering wheel, an airplane control stick, or the like. As a result, for example, if the rotary operation unit is shaped like a steering wheel of an automobile, the moment the player sees the rotary operation unit, the player may assume that the rotary operation unit is to be operated by grasping the rotary operation unit. Therefore, when a player-participation type effect that requires a variety of rotation operations is executed, it is not possible to perform a rotation operation that is different from the handle operation, and the player-participation type effect cannot be performed. There is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the game and will lose interest in the game. However, in this embodiment, the external appearance of the rotary operation unit 302 is completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, etc., so that the player is given a preconceived idea of how to operate the rotary operation unit 302. It is possible to wipe out, and the rotation operation part 302 can be operated at will by the player, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, even when the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral side surface and upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 are exposed to the outside. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation part 303 does not become an obstacle, and the rotation operation part 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be enjoyed and the decline of interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in front and below the game area 5a where a game is played on the game board 5, there are provided an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 for storing game balls B that bulge forward to perform a game. on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, an annular rotating operation part 302 with a rotating shaft extending vertically, and a central pressing operation part 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b in the ring of the rotating operation part 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. As the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 to detect rotation. , the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference, unlike the conventional rotary operation part. In addition, since the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, the portion (operation ring transmission gear 350) that transmits the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 ) can be a part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation part 302 . Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space below the rotary operation unit 302, and a performance in which a sufficient number of LEDs are annularly arranged in a height between the rotary operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345 is provided. An operation ring decoration board 352 can be arranged. Then, according to the game state that changes by playing a game in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board By properly emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 352, the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, which constitute the rotary operation unit 302, are sufficiently (uniformly) decorated with light. It is possible to make the rotary operation unit 302 conspicuous and strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, since the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotary operation unit 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. In the same direction and at the same speed, a plurality of LEDs arranged in a circular ring on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be sequentially lighted (turned on/off). As a result, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates in a state in which specific portions of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are decorated with light. An illusion can be created as if an LED is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotary operation unit 302 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Alternatively, according to the game state, when executing a player-participation type effect that requires a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the desired direction of operation, the player can be encouraged to rotate the rotary operation unit 302, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed to suppress the loss of interest.

Also, the rotation direction and rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302 are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and are arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352. A plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so as to have the same rotational speed as the rotary operation unit 302 . As a result, even though the player is rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates together with the rotary operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotary operation unit 302 emits light. , a strong impact can be given to the player, and the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the luminous decoration can give a premium feeling, and at the same time, it is thought that something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the players think and raise their expectations for the game, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs arranged in a circular ring on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made to emit light in sequence, the player can see the light emission decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that an annular rotating operation part 302 is for rotating operation, and to make it easy for a player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. At the same time, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the player participation type performance, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, the transmission detection gear member 345 is mounted rotatably around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation A transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the part 302, and in the plate unit 200, the configuration related to the rotation operation part 302 (the effect operation unit 300 or the rotation drive unit 340) can be compactly assembled, the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be conspicuous and strongly attracted to the player.

Furthermore, it is equipped with an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotates the rotation operation unit 302 via a transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state, and as described above, a rotation that can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration board 352 Since the operation part 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the player's rotation operation, the rotation operation part 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated in accordance with the game state, and light is emitted. By decorating, it is possible to make the rotary operation part 302 conspicuous in the lower and front part of the game area 5a, and to attract the player's attention to the rotary operation part 302 strongly.

In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation part 302, the rotation is detected. By rotating the rotary operation unit 302 in the same direction as the operation unit 302 by the operation ring driving motor 342, the rotary operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotary operation unit 302 can be lightened. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 by the operation ring driving motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, it is possible to apply a load to the rotary operation of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby improving the operational feeling of the rotary operation unit 302. can be heavy. Furthermore, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed by applying a rotation force to the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring driving motor 342 for each predetermined rotation angle. A click feeling can be given. Further, by reciprocally rotating the rotary operation portion 302 within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring driving motor 342, the rotary operation portion 302 can be vibrated. In this way, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operational feeling to the rotary operation unit 302, it is possible to respond to more various player participation type productions, so that the game can be played with various productions. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the production operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when giving the operation feeling of the rotary operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be operated in the same manner as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in a direction or in a direction opposite to the rotation operation, the operation feeling can be supported by the light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, it becomes easier to secure a space below the rotary operation unit 302, and a larger number of LEDs can be mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be arranged, the rotary operation unit 302 can be more uniformly and brightly decorated with light, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, the rotary operating section 302, the outer peripheral pressing operating section 303b, and the central pressing operating section 303a are each illuminated and decorated in good condition by the effect operation ring decorating board 352, the outer peripheral button decorating board 377, and the central button decorating board 376. Therefore, by making them emit light as appropriate, only the rotary operation portion 302 can be decorated with light, only the pressing operation portion 303 can be decorated with light, only the central pressing operation portion 303a can be decorated with light, and the peripheral pressing operation can be performed. Only the portion 303b can be illuminated to make it easier for the player to recognize the operation portion to be operated, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation.

In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the peripheral button decoration board 377, by sequentially illuminating the LEDs, it is possible to create a lighting effect in which the light rotates. It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the effect by the outer circumference button decoration board 377 in the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are associated. Specifically, for example, when prompting the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the LED of the outer circumference button decoration board 377 are caused to emit light in sequence. , luminous decoration in which the light rotates in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the LED (peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 rotates the light according to the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, and the player can On the other hand, when it is desired to reverse the rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302, the LEDs of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are used to rotate the light in the reverse direction. In this way, since the player can see the effects of various light emission, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, a production operation ring decoration board 352, an outer circumference button decoration board 377, and a center button decoration board 376, which light-embellish the rotary operation part 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b, and the central pressing operation part 303a arranged concentrically, respectively, are provided. For example, by causing the respective LEDs to emit light in the order of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the center button decoration board 376, or in the reverse order, the rotary operation unit 302 It is possible to show an effect of light concentrating from the center pressing operation portion 303a and a light effect of diffusing from the center pressing operation portion 303a to the rotary operation portion 302. FIG. As a result, it is possible to show the player more colorful luminous decorations, to entertain the player, and to direct the player's attention to the central pressing operation part 303a or to the rotation operation part 302. It is possible to encourage the operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the rotation operation portion 302 to enjoy the player participation type presentation.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is played is detachably attached to the body frame 4 from the front, and the front face of the body frame 4 can be opened and closed. The door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 which is closed to the outside is formed with a door window 101a through which the game area 5a can be viewed from the front. is attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close the door frame base 101, and below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101, an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 for storing game balls B for playing games are provided. A plate unit 200 is installed.

On the upper surface of the plate unit 200, there is provided an annular donut-shaped rotary operation portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and a cylindrical rotary operation portion 302 coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302. and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a. Two large-diameter plate center top decorations 312a and plate center bottom decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other, and are continuous with both ends of the plate center top decorations 312a and plate center bottom decorations 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450 are similarly shaped as shown in FIG. 453 is attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two center upper and lower plate decorations 312a and 312b. Since the operating portion 303b and the central pressing operating portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, the rotary operating portion 302 and the pressing operating portion 303 can be made more conspicuous, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby enhancing the interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, the rotary operation part 302, the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are formed in a donut shape in which a similar columnar shape (tube) is ringed, and provided below the rotation operation part 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the plate center upper decoration 312a. As a result, the player can see the decoration as if the outer periphery of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube, and the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be given a sense of unity. The appearance can be improved, and the player's interest can be directed to the inside (the game area 5a, the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube to enhance the appeal. , the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by heightening expectations for the game on the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the rotary operation part 302 has a donut shape, which is a circular cylindrical shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, etc. of the rotary operation part 302 are easier to handle than in the case of a flat disc shape. Since it becomes easier for a finger to be applied, the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 as he likes. Further, since the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation portion 302, the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. Since it protrudes outward, the player can put his/her arm or put his or her finger on the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, and the player can operate the rotation operation part 302 in a comfortable posture. At the same time, the presence of the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation part 302 prevents the player from getting too close to the rotation operation part 302. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotary operation unit 302 in which the player's arms and fingers can be moved, and the operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be enhanced. In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 as desired when the player participation type production is executed. It is possible to entertain the participatory performance and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Further, the pressing operation portion 303 composed of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a inside the rotating operation portion 302 can be moved between a retracted position (lowered position) and a projected position (raised position). Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation portion 303 protrudes upward more than the rotating operation portion 302, so that the rotating operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made to appear larger. As well as being able to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, heighten the expectation for the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and suppress the decline in interest. can be made

Also, when the pressing operation part 303 is at the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation part 303, so that the player's attention should be directed to the rotation operation part 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation part 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation part 303 is more conspicuous than the rotating operation part 302, so that the player's attention can be directed to the pressing operation part 303. Therefore, by moving the pressing operation part 303 between the lowered position and the raised position according to the content of the player participation type presentation to be executed, the player is prompted to operate the presentation operation part 301 to be operated. This allows the player to operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 accurately to enjoy the player-participation type performance.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 303 inside the rotating operation portion 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotating operation portion 302, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b, and the central pressing portion 303a are all at the same height, and the rotation operation is performed. When the portion 302 and the central pressing operation portion 303a become operable and the pressing operation portion 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a protrude above the rotation operation portion 302. At the same time, the rotation operating section 302, the outer peripheral pressing operating section 303b, and the central pressing operating section 303a become operable. Therefore, depending on the contents of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be properly used, and more various productions can be handled, and the player can enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the plate center upper decoration board 314 and the plate center lower decoration board 316, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 Since the substrate 418, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are provided, the rotation operation part 302 and the plate center upper decoration body 312a are provided. The overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved by luminous decoration of the plate center lower decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing by strongly attracting the interest of the players. In addition, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the plate center lower decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are appropriately illuminated. By decorating, the player's line of sight can be guided from within the game area 5a to the production operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302), or guided from the production operation section 301 to the game area 5a. A player can be made to operate the performance operation part 301 or play a game in the game area 5a according to the state, and the player can be prevented from getting bored and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Although the pachinko machine 1 has been described above with reference to a preferred embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and modified in various ways.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b may be detected. As a result, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are changed to different effects, and when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is prompted. This makes it possible to perform more diverse player-participation-type presentations, entertain the player, and suppress the loss of interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the pressing operation portion 303 (the central pressing portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is moved to the raised position, pressing the pressing portion 303 moves to the lowered position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the downward movement may be restricted after a slight downward movement from the elevated position when the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed in the elevated position.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rotating operation part 302 is provided on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 that protrudes forward, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating operation part is arranged inside the dish unit. In addition, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation portion may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the plate unit. This also allows the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation section as described above, and suppresses the loss of interest in the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the body frame 4 is provided with the speaker unit 620a communicating with the panel inner space 40a (port member 47) via the connecting tube portion 43a, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

[Other forms of pachinko machines]
Next, another form of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 128. FIG. Since the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is mainly the game board 5 and the handle unit 180 of the above pachinko machine 1, the explanation other than those related thereto is omitted in principle. Therefore, in FIGS. 103 to 128 and FIGS. 1 to 102, constituent elements with the same reference numerals are, in principle, identical or have the same function.

[game board]
The game board 5 of this embodiment, as shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. and a production unit 814 attached to the side.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 115, the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 made of opaque plywood, a rear decorative member 817 for applying a background decoration 816, a game area 5a and a center member 2500. and a front component 1000 enclosing the .

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 is formed of a plywood board as described above, and a synthetic resin cell that becomes the first decorative surface 819 is adhered to the entire front surface thereof. Embellishments 820a (in this version a random arrangement of a boy's face) are printed. Also, a large through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 is formed at a position near the center of the base panel 1110 .

[Back side decorative member]
117, the exploded perspective view of FIG. 118, and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. Through the support frame 852 (specifically, because it is screwed to the front surface of the effect support frame 852, it is integrated with the effect support frame 852 in terms of form.) It is arranged on the back surface of the base panel 1110, and the A background decoration 816 (for example, the decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 and are connected to complete one character.) is formed. In the second decorative surface 822, plate pieces 822p of several blocks are arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward, so that the decoration 816 itself is given a three-dimensional effect of perspective.
The rear side decorative member 817 is arranged in such a manner as to correspond to the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110 for mounting the center member 2500. The upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, the right decorative member 817c, and the left decorative member. 817d, of which the upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, and the right decorative member 817c are arranged so that their second decorative surfaces 822 face the inside of the through hole 1112, while the left decorative member 817d A second decorative surface 822 is positioned to face the back surface of the base panel 1110 as shown in FIG. In addition, since the second decorative surface 822 of the left decorative member 817d is arranged opposite to the back surface of the opaque base panel 1110 in this way, it is not visible to the player in a normal state, but is shown in FIG. Some of them can be recognized when viewed obliquely. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the background decoration 816 extends to the far side of the base panel 1110 where the player cannot see, so that the three-dimensional effect can be further enhanced.

In the game area 5a surrounded by the front component member 1000 of the base panel 1110, as described above, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, not shown Windmills, obstacle nails, etc. that change the drop of the game ball are appropriately provided according to the contents of the game, and an out ball port 1008 for collecting the out ball is provided at the lowest position.
Most of these members are made of transparent synthetic resin, so that the background decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 is hardly hidden.

[Front component]
As shown in FIG. 116, the front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that separates the upper outer side of the play area 5a and the center member 2500, and an inner rail that separates the play area 5a from the side and lower sides of the center member 2500. A game ball shot from the shooting rail 544 passes through the shooting passage portion 1012 between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 to the upper part of the game area 5a or the upper part of the center member 2500. be guided.
The front component member 1000 is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin, and its surface can be seen through when installed on the base panel 1110 . On the other hand, as described above, the base panel 1110 of this embodiment has the background decoration 820a over the entire front surface, so that the front component 1000 is almost inconspicuous when camouflaged with the background decoration 820a. It looks as if the entire front of 1110 is a large playing area 5a. Therefore, a visual effect is obtained as if the entire game panel 1100 were expanded to the game area 5a, as compared with a conventional pachinko machine surrounded by an opaque front structural member.
In this embodiment, the background decorations 820a inside and outside the game area 5a are unified in terms of design (including not only uniformity in appearance but also conceptual uniformity) to visually expand the game area 5a. However, the background decoration 820a of the portion corresponding to the game area 5a and the front structural member 1000 may be designed differently without uniformity. In such a case, since the front component 1000 can be decorated by printing the first decorative surface 819, there is no need to decorate the front component 1000 itself, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game panel 1100 of this embodiment is configured as described above, and the difference in depth between the first decorative surface 819 on the front side of the game panel 1100 and the second decorative surface 822 on the back side of the game panel 1100 allows the background decoration. Since 816 and 20 have a three-dimensional effect of perspective, a novel game machine can be provided.

[Center member]
The center member 2500 is provided with a mounting flange portion 830 having a contour slightly larger than the contour of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110, and protruding from the back side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to be loosely fitted into the through hole 1112. It has an inner frame portion 831 and a surrounding frame 832 protruding from the front side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a. is formed by
A tapered portion 833 that tapers toward the base panel 1110 is formed on the peripheral edge of the attachment flange portion 830 of the center member 2500 . In this embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 109, at least the tapered portion 833 of the portion (for example, the mounting flange portion 830 of the upper half of the center member 2500) that can be seen by the player during the game is formed by the through hole 1112. Conventionally, the engagement between the mounting flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 is shallowly set so that the attachment flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 are engaged with each other. As a result, the light that illuminates the inside of the through hole 1112 passes through the tapered portion 833 of the mounting flange portion 830 and changes like a prism and leaks to the outside. can be easily and effectively decorated.

In addition, the center member 2500 is a board having a production area 834 facing a drum 854 (described later) of the production unit 814 inside the surrounding frame 832, and a decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with the game area 5a. and a decorative member 836 having a shape.

[Production area - light guide plate unit]
A performance area 834 of the center member 2500 is provided with a light guide plate unit 837 for protecting and decorating the front surface of a drum unit 855, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 113, this light guide plate unit 837 is obtained by fitting a light guide plate 842 into a frame-shaped display window 841 including a vertical frame 839 containing a light emitting device 838 and a horizontal frame 840 . 839 and the light emitting device 838 of the horizontal frame 840 irradiate the light guide incident end surface of the light guide plate 842 to display a predetermined image in a dramatic manner.
It should be noted that the light guide plate 842 is fitted into the display window 841 in such a manner that it rattles by several millimeters (for example, 3 mm). By doing so, even if the light guide plate 842 thermally expands, stress is less likely to be applied, so that the risk of deformation or breakage of the light guide plate 842 due to thermal stress can be reduced. Further, for the same purpose, the light guide plate 842 may be attached in such a manner that some of its four sides are fixed with screws (not shown) or the like, and the other sides are unconstrained and movable.

[Decorative member]
The decorative member 836 of the center member 2500 is a transparent synthetic resin plate projecting from the inner side of the enclosing frame 832 of the center member 2500 toward the vertical frame 839 and the horizontal frame 840 of the display window 841, and has a game area on the surface. It has a decorative surface 835 with a height almost flush with 5a. As shown in FIG. 114, this decorative surface 835 has uniformity with the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 of the base panel 1110 (including uniformity in appearance as well as in concept). ) is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 113, the difference in position and size between the rendering area 834 and the through hole 1112 indicated by imaginary lines in FIG. part) can be filled in in a natural way. That is, the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 naturally bites into the center member 2500. As shown in FIG. In addition, although uniformity is achieved by the decoration, the light-emitting decoration may be arranged so as to straddle the outer and inner sides of the center member 2500 .
Therefore, by adjusting the size of the decorative member 836 according to the size of the rendering area 834, it is possible to support many models with a minimum design change while maintaining the outer shape of the center member 2500. FIG.
The decoration 843 drawn on the decorative surface 835 of this embodiment is drawn with ink having excellent light-shielding properties. By contrast with 816, the three-dimensional effect is further enhanced. Moreover, there is also the advantage that the light illuminating from the inside of the through hole 1112 can be moderated in an indirect lighting manner due to the light shielding property of the decoration 843 .
In addition, in this embodiment, a decorative lamp 844H for decoration is provided above the drum 854, which will be described later, at the upper front of the production support frame 852, which will be described later. , a notch 845 is formed to avoid polymerization. As a result, there is no possibility that the light of the decorative lamp 844H is reflected on the decorative member 836 and becomes difficult to see, so the definition of the decorative lamp 844H is improved.

[Accessories, etc. attached to the center member]
As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the center member 2500 has a stage shelf 2503 on which the game ball falls into the game area 5a while floating in the left-right direction, and a stage shelf 2503 which enters from the game area 5a. Warp path 847 for guiding game ball B to stage shelf 2503 is integrally provided. As described above, the first starting port 2002 is arranged directly below the stage shelf 2503 in the game area 5a, and when a game ball falls from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it can win a prize with a high probability.

In addition, on the right outer upper half of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500 facing the front, a right hitting guide passage 848 that guides the game ball jumping over its own upper part along the outer rail 1001 to the lower right side of the game area 5a. is provided. This right-handed guide passage 848 has a width of approximately one game ball, and on the right inner wall and the left inner wall of the passage in front view, hump-like obstruction ridges 849 are protruded alternately at substantially equal pitches. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right-handed guide passage 848 touches a large number of obstacle ridges 849 and meanders, as if it were falling while colliding with obstacle nails in the game area 5a. It is led to the lower right side of the game area 5a over time.

In addition, a second starting opening 2004 is provided in the right outer lower half of the enclosing frame 832 of the center member 2500, and the winning opening is opened and closed by turning the opening/closing piece 850. A passage-type gate portion 2003 is provided in the middle of the guide passage 848 in the vertical direction. The gate portion 2003 is installed on an extending portion 830a extending in a horizontal peninsular shape from the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500, and the rear portion of the gate portion 2003 is aligned with the extending portion 830a of the center member 2500 so as to be aligned with the base panel 1110. is housed in a curved notch 1112a carved in the through hole 1112 of . A gate portion 2003 (the same applies to the other winning openings) is installed in the extended portion 830a projecting like a peninsula from the mounting flange portion 830, and a bay-shaped cut portion 1112a is cut into the through hole 1112. Compared to the case where the gate 2003 or the like having its own mounting flange is separately installed in the independent form, the mounting flange on the side of the center member 2500 becomes unnecessary, resulting in an installation space. can be made compact, and the area of the plywood board of the base panel 1110 in the portion where the game balls flow can be increased accordingly. The plywood board is characterized by the fact that it is easy to drive and adjust the nails, and that the nails do not easily come off even after long-term use. A game ball that has entered the right-handed guide passage 848 is once guided to the area of the synthetic resin plate of the center member 2500, but when the game ball is ejected to the outside of the center member 2500, the area of the plywood board where the obstruction nail is provided. It means to spit it out.

[Production unit]
The effect unit 814 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a display device 851 capable of displaying, as game information, the result of a lottery relating to a big win, which is started when a game ball is detected by the first starting port 2002, for example. , a frame-shaped production support frame 852 that supports the display device 851, and a rear cover 853 that is attached to the rear surface of the production support frame 852 and covers the rear surface of the display device 851.

[Display device]
The display device 851 may be either an image display type such as the liquid crystal display device described above or a real movement type capable of displaying the game information by mechanical changes such as rotation and stoppage of a movable object. The latter production type is used.
As shown in FIGS. 119 to 123, the actual movement type display device 851 includes a plurality of sets (three sets in this embodiment) of drum units 855 that can rotate and move up and down a drum 854, which is a movable object, in a row. They are arranged side by side and fixedly connected by a connecting plate 856 .

[Drum unit]
Each drum unit 855, as shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. It is roughly composed of a movement driving device 858 for vertically moving the drum 854 and an illumination member 859 for illuminating the drum 854 from the inside to clarify the game information.

The drum 854 is formed of a thin sheet made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of characters and patterns are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on its peripheral surface.
A rotary driving device 857 for rotating the drum 854 includes a rim-shaped ring member 860 fixed to one opening edge of the drum 854 , and a rim-shaped ring member 860 that is disposed at the center of the drum 854 and gradually expands in diameter toward the ring member 860 . In addition, a central member 861 having a frustum cylindrical shape that opens outward on the ring member 860 side, a connecting member 862 that radially connects the ring member 860 and the central member 861, and an electric motor that is directly connected to the central member 861. By rotating or stopping the drive shaft of the electric motor 863, the central member 861, the connecting member 862, the ring member 860, and the drum 854 rotate or stop together.

The rotation drive device 857 is provided with air cooling means for cooling the inside of the drum 854 by passing air through it. That is, the air cooling means consists of sirocco fan-shaped intake winglets 864 formed on the peripheral wall of the central member 861 and propeller fan-shaped exhaust winglets 865 formed on the connecting member 862 . By rotating in the indicated direction, air is sucked from the opening of the central member 861 in the manner of a sirocco fan and discharged into the space between the outside of the central member 861 and the inside of the drum 854, and the air guided into this space is driven by the propeller fan. to the outside of the drum 854 from between the connecting members 862 and 862 in the manner of . Therefore, a U-turn airflow is generated in which the intake air and the exhaust air flow in opposite directions inside and outside the central member 861 of the drum 854, so that the inside of the drum 854 is efficiently cooled.

A movement driving device 858 that vertically moves the drum 854 together with a rotation driving device 857 includes an electric motor 863 of the drum unit 855, a disk-shaped support substrate 866 that supports the illumination member 859, and a support substrate 866 that can slide up and down. a guide shaft 867 supported by the support, a male screw-shaped drive shaft 868 erected parallel to the guide shaft 867, upper and lower bearing pedestals 869 supporting the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867, and an upper bearing pedestal and a lift motor 870 for drive shaft 868 mounted on top of 869 .
Therefore, when the drive shaft 868 is rotated by the lift motor 870, the support substrate 866 rises or falls along the spiral of the drive shaft 868, and the drum 854 rises together with the rotation drive device 857 as shown by the solid line in FIG. Or it descends like the imaginary line in the figure. Incidentally, the drum 854 is usually stopped at a substantially intermediate position (hereinafter referred to as a "reference position") of the movable range. may be moved up and down separately. Also, when the drum 854 is at the highest or lowest position, as shown in FIG. 123, part of the drum 854 is out of the display window 841 and cannot be seen. It exists within the frame of the display window 841 .

By the way, the movement driving device 858 of this embodiment is adapted to move the drum 854 only in the vertical direction, but for example, another set of a combination of a driving shaft 868, a guide shaft 867, a bearing base 869 and a supporting substrate 866 is added. Then, the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 are rotated horizontally, and it is incorporated between the original support substrate 866 and the electric motor 863, that is, the two bearing pedestals added to the original support substrate 866. 869 may be fixed side by side so that the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 are crossed sideways, and the electric motor 863 may be attached to a new support substrate 866 supported by the sideways drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867. By doing so, each drum 854 can be freely moved up and down and back and forth, so that the variation of the performance by the drum 854 is greatly improved, and the back and forth movement can temporarily avoid the member that becomes an obstacle to the up and down movement. is also possible.

Further, in the display device 851 of this embodiment, linear illuminations 871 a to 871 d are provided between the drums 854 of the plurality of drum units 855 . The linear illuminations 871a to 871d are light emitters such as cold-cathode tubes, for example, and are formed so as to curve in an arc shape (arcuate shape) toward the front surface (player). The degree of curvature of the linear illuminations 871a and 871d located between the drums 854 is set more gently than the degree of curvature of the linear illuminations 871b and 871c provided between the drums 854, are installed so as to protrude toward the player from the linear illuminations 871a and 871d positioned at both ends of the drum 854. As shown in FIG. This makes it possible to impart a three-dimensional effect to the front surface of the drum 854 with the linear illuminations 871a to 871d turned on.

The display device 851 is attached to the game board 5 from the rear side by an effect support frame 852 which will be described in detail below. is designed to fit. In other words, the vertical width of the display window 841 is larger than the vertical width (diameter of the drum 854) of the drum 854, which is a movable object, so that the display window 841 shows the game information in front of the stopped drum 854. In addition, at least one of the upper and lower outlines of the drum 854 is visible to the player. Since at least one of the upper and lower outlines of the drum 854 can be seen through the display window 841, the player can feel as if the drum 854 is floating in the air without any support.

Since the display device 851 is configured as described above, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 as described above, the main control board 1310 performs a lottery to determine hit or miss. is performed, and the result of the lottery is a combination of the patterns of the drum 854 stopped within the frame of the display window 841 after a certain period of production operation by mechanical change that appropriately combines the rotation and vertical movement of the drum 854. is displayed. If the result of the lottery is a big win, a benefit is given that a large amount of prizes to the big prize winning port 2005 can be easily won within the range of predetermined conditions. Of course, the presentation operation of the display device 851 may be of any kind.
In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing (preferably before the opening of the large winning opening 2005) at which a large amount of winning to the large winning opening 2005 becomes possible, the game ball should be hit to the right. (For example, the display panel 2005p indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 103 is switched from OFF to ON to display characters such as "Please hit right."). Alternatively, a guidance such as "Please hit to the right." is provided by voice.) A hitting method instruction means is provided, thereby maximizing the player's profit.

[Direction support frame]
The effect support frame 852 is in the form of a picture frame having an opening-shaped installation portion 872 for mounting the display device 851, and is fixedly attached to the back surface of the base panel 1110 with screws or the like. In addition to the display device 851 , the back side decorative member 817 having the second decorative surface 822 is attached to the effect support frame 852 so as to surround the display device 851 on all sides. In addition, the effect support frame 852 is provided with a decorative lamp 844H positioned above the drum 854 on the front upper part as described above, and furthermore, the effect support frame 852 has a decorative lamp 844H positioned above the drum 854 on the front lower part of the effect support frame 852 below the drum 854. A decorative lamp 844L is provided for decoration. By blinking the upper and lower decoration lamps 844H and 844L at the same time, for example, it is possible to clearly inform the target of attention among the plurality of drums 854 .

[Rear cover]
The rear cover 853 is attached to the rear surface of the production support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851. As shown in FIG. , and the rear surface is also provided with ventilation holes 874 for heat dissipation. In addition, above and below the rear cover 853, effect lighting 875 for irradiating light toward the drum 854 of the display device 851 is provided, so that the outline of the drum 854 is illuminated by lighting from the rear side. there is At least the inner surface of the rear cover 853 has a dark color (specifically, black) in order to enhance the effect of the light produced by the production lighting 875 . Also, the effect lighting 875 is attached to the outside of the rear cover 853, and a light emitter 876 such as an LED is exposed to the inside of the rear cover 853 from there. A half mirror 877 is provided in the rear cover 853 at a portion corresponding to the production lighting 875 so that the rear side of the drum 854 can be seen on the mirror surface when the production lighting 875 is off. As a result, the rear side of the drum 854 is also produced gorgeously.

The present embodiment described above includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical thought 1]
a game panel having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a center member having at least an effect area inside an enclosing frame that is attached to a through hole formed in the game panel and capable of preventing inflow of game balls from the game area, the game machine comprising:
A gaming machine comprising a decorative member provided with a decorative surface substantially flush with the game area inside the surrounding frame of the center member.

[Technical thought 2]
a display device that displays game information by moving a movable object;
a display window that allows the presence of the display device to be recognized,
A gaming machine that allows a player to recognize game information by means of the movable body that is recognizable through the display window,
A gaming machine, wherein the display window is formed in such a manner that at least one of the upper and lower contours of the movable object can be seen by the player in addition to the portion that displays the game information of the movable object.

[Technical thought 3]
A game machine comprising a game panel having a game area in which game balls can flow down,
a first decorative surface for applying background decoration formed on the front surface of the game panel;
A gaming machine comprising a second decorative surface for applying background decoration formed at a position recessed from the front surface of the game panel.

[Technical Thought 4] *Claim 1 of the base application (Patent Application No. 2016-233626)
A game machine comprising an operation medium for game operation on the front surface of a door frame disposed at a position facing a player,
A gaming machine characterized in that a hand cover section is provided on the front surface of the door frame so as to cover the vicinity of the periphery of a player's hand that operates the operation medium.

[Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128 and the like. Since the basic configuration for adjusting the firing force of the handle unit 180 is almost the same as that described in paragraphs [0204] to [0219] and [Fig. 38], Figs. Refer to FIG. 38 for a description of the parts not shown.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100), and is manually rotated by the player to control the ball shooting device 540 and shoot the game ball B in the upper tray 201. The player hits the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 as an operation medium rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184L mounted on the front surface, and covering the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. A handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 and a hand cover part 195 provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 to cover the vicinity of the periphery of the hand of the player who operates the handle 182.

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 (see FIG. 38) meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a (see FIG. 38) that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. ) and sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186 (see FIG. 38).

One end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 can be returned to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation start point when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 (see FIG. 38) biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 (see FIG. 38) attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a front end of the handle base 181 extending outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 (see FIG. 38) which protrudes and is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 at its base end so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 are detected. and a single button operation sensor 194 (see FIG. 38) attached to the handle base 181 .

[Handle base]
A handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a cup-shaped front end portion 181b provided at the front end of the base portion 181a, and a recessed portion extending inward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three grooves 181c (see FIG. 38) extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .
Around the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, a bowl-shaped screen member 196 colored in white is provided in a state of being fixed to the handle mounting portion 102. The full-color LED light emitted from the end portion of the side unit 410 toward the screen member 196 can be reflected with almost the same color.

[handle]
The handle 182 is based on a disc having a diameter and thickness suitable for a player to hold with one hand, protrudes from its outer peripheral surface to a height greater than or equal to the height at which one finger can be inserted in the circumferential direction. Four finger hooks 182g to 182j protruding at substantially point-symmetrical positions with respect to the rotation center (shaft member 187), that is, at equal intervals (90 degrees), and a circle centered on the rotation axis (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a hook that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slit 182e and engages the other end side of the handle return spring 190. and a stop protrusion 182f (see FIG. 38).

A decorative handle 1820, which is an annular decorative member concentric with the handle 182, is provided integrally with the handle 182 via the finger hooks 182g to 182j. The decorative handle 1820 has a front surface covered with a translucent decorative cover 1821 and an outer peripheral surface covered with a conductive touch cover 1822 serving as a sensing portion of the handle touch sensor 192, and is disposed inside the hollow. A large number of light-emitting LEDs 1823 and light-emitting LEDs 182L provided in a dotted manner in front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j enable appropriate full-color presentation by light.

In addition, as an example of light production by the light-emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820, by visually changing the light emission mode of the plurality of light-emitting LEDs 182L, it is visually shown that the decorative handle 1820 is rotating to the right. It can be used as the above-described hitting style instruction means for instructing timing. In addition, preferably, full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 are used to produce a clockwise light flow in the entire door frame 3, which makes it even more dynamic. can be instructed to hit to the right. For example, the full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 are changed to "lower left → left → upper left → upper left → upper middle → upper right → upper right → right middle → The light is emitted in the order of the bottom right and the light is directed to flow to the right (clockwise), and the light emission LED 1823 of the decoration handle 1820 is caused to emit light in the form of inheriting the flow of light in the clockwise direction. In particular, if light is emitted from the light emitting LED 1823 closest to the full color LED positioned at the bottom of the door frame right side unit 410, a more interlocked (integrated) effect can be achieved. In this case, since the two lighting modes of the door frame 3 and the decorative handle 1820 are used to instruct the player how to hit the ball, even if one of the LEDs fails, the player can play the ball without any trouble. can direct you.
In this way, as an example of the light effect, the one indicating the right timing is shown. . For example, when instructing left-handed hitting from the right-handed state, a series of effects opposite to the light production in the case of right-handed hitting (for example, the light emitting LED 1823 on the decorative handle 1820 side is turned , the full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 are turned lower right → middle right → upper right → upper right → upper middle → upper left → upper left → middle left. → light up in the order of the lower left), or instead of instructing how to hit, for example, when a performance with a high degree of expectation for a hit is executed, a performance linked to that is executed, or the degree of expectation for a hit For example, the production linked to the production is executed before the production with a high value is executed. Further, the term "interlocking" as used herein refers to the interlocking of the above-described light effect that instructs how to play, for example, the effect that light flows from the top to the bottom of the pachinko machine 1 (the full-color LED of the door frame top unit 450). are illuminated, then the upper left and upper right are illuminated, then the top→middle→bottom of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 are illuminated, and finally the illumination LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 is illuminated. to emit light).
In addition, when the light emission LED 182L of the decoration handle 1820 is used as the hitting method instruction means, the light emission timing may be the same as the lighting of the display panel 2005p as other hitting method instruction means, or may be set to the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device). It may be the same as the displayed right-handed instruction, or before or after them, but it is better to do it at least before a large amount of prizes can be won in the big prize hole 2005 (before the big prize hole 2005 is opened). , is preferable in terms of protecting the interests of the player.

In addition, as an example of lighting effects of the light emitting LEDs 182L provided in dots in front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j, the lighting pattern can be changed according to the firing intensity of the ball launching device 540. FIG. For example, if the emission intensity is "weak", the color is blue, and if the emission intensity is "medium", the color is green. In a general pachinko machine 1, the right-handed state with the firing intensity set to ``strong'' is an advantageous game state such as a big hit or a variable probability, so when the firing intensity is set to ``strong'', psychological excitement is induced. It is preferable to light red, which is said to have an effect.

When the handle 182 is in the initial rotation position, the two finger hooks 182g and 182i are oriented horizontally, and the remaining two finger hooks 182h and 182j are oriented vertically. It is set in a cross shape so that when the player grips the handle 182 in a normal gripping style, the right thumb is naturally engaged with the lower side of the finger hook portion 182g located on the peripheral surface on the left side of the center of rotation. It has become. Therefore, in this embodiment, the finger hooking portion 182g is a finger hooking portion for normal operation. In this normal gripping style, the fingers other than the thumb cover the handle 182 in such a manner as to sandwich the upper finger hook portion 182h.
On the other hand, the finger hook portion 182j provided on the peripheral surface below the rotation center of the handle 182 is hardly touched by any finger in the above-described normal gripping style, but the gripping hand, for example, can be used to hold the handle 182. If a finger such as an index finger is hooked on the finger hooking portion 182j, the handle 182 can be rotated clockwise when viewed from the front by an irregular operation of moving the finger to the left. In this embodiment, as described above, there is provided a hitting direction instruction means (display panel 2005p) for instructing that the ball should be hit to the right. The command can be handled by applying a force in the direction opposite to the direction of the command to the finger hook portion 182j of the handle 182 (force in the left direction when viewed from the front).
Alternatively, the handle 182 may be rotated by pulling upward or downward by putting fingers on the finger hooking portions 182h and 182i other than the finger hooking portions 182g and 182j.

[Cover pedestal]
The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has a plurality of mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The mounting boss 183a is attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation from the initial rest position.

[Handle cap]
The handle cap 185 has a front surface that bulges forward in a round shape, and a central portion that is translucent. The inside of the handle cap 185 is equipped with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. This handle cap 185 can be produced with light by appropriately lighting the LED 184L on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184. FIG.

[Handle rotation detection sensor]
The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated clockwise in front view, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated through the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. rotates. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加In addition, in this embodiment, it is set so that when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the momentum of the game ball is increased.

[Handle touch sensor]
The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 182 or the finger hooks 182g to 182j or the touch cover 1822 of the decorative handle 1820, the game is started. The static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the player's contact with the handle 182 or the like is detected. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 adjusted (input) by the player. The drive of the shooting solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the , and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. The firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

[Handle mounting member]
The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 can be easily gripped, and the player can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

[Hand cover part]
A substantially cylindrical hand cover portion 195 that surrounds the vicinity of the outer circumference of the hand of the player who operates the handle 182 is attached to the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the outer side of the handle attachment portion 102, as shown in FIG. , its front opening 195h is generally aligned with the rear face of the ornamental handle 1820. As shown in FIG. The joint ring 1824 projecting from the rear surface of the hand cover portion 1820 and the annular slit 195a formed on the front surface of the hand cover portion 195 are slidably fitted together to form a joint between the hand cover portion 195 and the decorative handle 1820. Connected seamlessly.
The hand cover portion 195 can also be provided for the handle 182 without the decorative handle 1820. In this case, the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195 extends to the outer periphery of the handle 182. Along with extending, the front opening 195h may be provided with a decorative means similar to the decorative handle 1820. FIG.

In the hand cover part 195 of the embodiment, a window opening 195w leading to the outside is opened in a part of the body part. To prevent stagnation of an inflowing beverage or the like, and to prevent fraudulent acts by improving the visibility of the inside.
In order to facilitate the cleaning of the inside of the hand cover portion 195 and the wiping of the beverage that has flowed in, the handle 182 may be detachable as shown in FIG. Specifically, the base 181a of the handle base 181 and the screen member 196 fixed to the side of the handle mounting portion 102 are provided with engagement/disengagement means 197, for example, a combination of a claw piece 197a and an elastically deformable receiving piece 197b. By engaging (see the solid line in the enlarged view of FIG. 128) and disengaging (see the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. 128) the engaging/disengaging means 197, the handle 182 is attached to the handle mounting portion together with the handle base 181 as shown in FIG. You may make it removable from the 102 side. By doing so, the handle 182 can be removed from the handle mounting portion 102 and the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195 can be fully opened, thereby facilitating cleaning of the inside and wiping of spilled beverages. Also, preferably, if the release operation of the engaging/disengaging means 197 is performed by a dedicated release member (for example, insertion of a thumbtack-type pin), there is no danger that the handle 182 will be pulled out by mischief or the like.

By providing the hand cover portion 195 on the outside of the handle 182 as described above, the player's hand (fingers) operating the handle 182 seems to have entered the hand cover portion 195, that is, the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she is operating the pachinko machine 1 more strongly.
In addition, if a blowing means (not shown) is connected to the hand cover portion 195 to blow air, most of the wind blows out from the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, so that the player's hands can be reliably blown with air. can be done. Therefore, for example, when there is a high expectation for a big hit, or when there is a high expectation for an advantageous hit (a hit with a high probability or a lot of balls), it is possible to send the wind with a predetermined effect (for example, like an air cannon) When it is controlled in a game state (for example, during variable probability, during short time, during latent probability), the wind is sent at regular timing such as every 5 seconds, or after performing a predetermined lottery, the lottery It is possible to effectively perform effects such as sending wind when winning. Of course, you may make it always send wind.
Also, although not shown, a speaker for games (preferably a vibration speaker) may be provided inside the hand cover portion 195 . In such a case, since the sound of the speaker is emitted from the front opening 195h of the hand cover part 195, the vibration of the sound can be effectively felt in the hands of the player.

The above embodiments include the following technical ideas.
[Technical Thought 5]
a ball launcher for hitting game balls into the game area of the game board;
A game machine comprising a handle for adjusting the firing force of the ball launching device by a manual rotating operation,
The handle is
a finger hook for normal operation, which is provided on the peripheral surface on the left side of the rotation center of itself and can be engaged with the thumb of the hand operated in a normal grip style;
In addition to the finger hook, it is provided on the peripheral surface below the rotation center of the handle, and has a finger hook that can be operated irregularly and can be engaged with at least one finger of the player's hand. A gaming machine characterized by:
In addition, in such gaming machines,
A hitting method instructing means for instructing the player how to hit the game ball according to the game situation,
On the other hand, the handle is set so that the firing force increases when it is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front,
When the hitting method instructing means indicates that the player should hit on the right side of the game area, it is possible to respond by applying a force in the left direction in front view to the finger hook portion for irregular operation of the handle. can be

Although the configuration of the pachinko machine has been described above, it is of course possible to change the configuration as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a mammoth ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates reels.

Further, in the above embodiment, the electric motor 863 of the rotary drive device 857 and the lift motor 870 of the movement drive device 858 are oriented in different directions. On the other hand, the output shaft of the lift motor 870 is oriented perpendicular to the drive shaft 868 of the drum unit 855, and so on. can be made the same. However, in the case where the electric motor 863 and the lifting motor 870 are set in different directions as in the above embodiment, it is necessary to identify the motor that is the cause when trouble occurs in either the rotating operation or the lifting operation of the drum 854, and to take appropriate measures. It is excellent in that it can be performed quickly.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque base panel 1110 has been described as an example, but the base panel 1110 may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.
Further, in the above embodiment, the background decorations 816, 820a, 820b, and 843 are patterns such as printing, but they may be decorations using light emitters such as LEDs.

In the above embodiment, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle base 181 and the handle 182 rotates between them. You can get it.

Further, in the above embodiment, the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the hand cover portion 195 are combined. can be enjoyed to

[Embodiment of the present invention]
Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 140, taking the pachinko machine 1 as an example. The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIGS. The explanation is omitted.

The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. Two handle units 180 are provided. In FIG. 129, the right handle unit (hereinafter also referred to as the "right handle unit") 180(R) adjusts the strength of the hitting ball of the ball launching device 540 as described above. On the other hand, the left handle unit (hereinafter also referred to as "left handle unit") 180(L) is used as an input means for the player in the above-described player participation type production.

Each of the handle units 180(L), (R) is provided with an operating portion comprising the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the finger hooks 182g to 182j as described above. is inserted and rotated (operated).

Each handle unit 180(L), (R) is formed so that the outer diameter of the decorative handle 1820 around the handle 182 is smaller than the inner diameter of the front opening 195h of the hand cover part 195, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is It is slidably supported by the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 , so that the entire unit can move linearly in the front-rear direction within the hand cover portion 195 . Each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is directed toward the player by a spring 4001 of a handle position control means 4000 (to be described later), which is loaded in a compressed state inside the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Always energized.

[Right handle unit]
The right handle unit 180(R) adjusts the striking force of the ball launcher 540 by turning the handle 182 as described above. 195h (hereinafter referred to as "front position"), and is locked (fixed) by the handle position control means 4000 at this front position.

[Handle Position Control Means of Right Handle Unit]
A handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as a "right handle position control means") 4000 of the right handle unit 180(R) includes a swingable lock arm 4004 having a roller 4003 at its tip, and the lock arm 4004, It consists of a solenoid 4005 that changes between a horizontal locking posture (see solid line in FIG. 134) and a release posture (see imaginary line in FIG. 134) in which the roller 4003 side is flipped up.
When the lock arm 4004 is in the horizontal locking posture, it lies like a support bar between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180(R) and the handle mounting member 102 to hold the right handle unit 180(R). When the plunger 4006 of the solenoid 4005 is pulled up from this state to swing the lock arm 4004 to the release posture, the roller 4003 is disengaged from the handle base 181 (the thrust of the lock arm 4004 is disengaged). The right handle unit 180(R) is unlocked and can be moved linearly behind the hand cover portion 195 (hereinafter referred to as "rear position") as shown in FIG.
The lock arm 4004 is urged from the unlocked posture to the locked posture by, for example, a torsion coil spring (not shown). When returned to the position, it automatically returns to the locked posture.

The right handle unit 180 (R) may be used as input means for appropriately detecting an operation to move the entire unit from the locked state with a sensor and issuing an input signal to the player participation type performance (that is, one The handle unit 180 can be used to input the striking force of the ball launching device 540 and input the player participation type effect.) In the embodiment, the striking force of the ball launching device 540 is adjusted by moving the entire unit from a stopped state. It is used as a second input means to

Specifically, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in with the right handle position control means 4000 unlocked, the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is applied to the handle in proportion to the linear displacement. It becomes stronger in the form of taking over the striking force immediately before by the rotation of 182 (meaning to eliminate the problem that the striking force is temporarily reduced at the point where the operating subject is switched), and when it is pushed to the rear position as it is, the striking force of the game ball is the strong. level to the right (see paragraph [0710]), and return the right handle unit 180(R) from the rear position to the front position (relax the pushing force on the right handle unit 180(R). ), and the hitting force based on the rotation angle of the handle 182 (usually the hitting force in the previous game).

Alternatively, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in, a striking force control signal is immediately sent so that the striking force of the ball launching device 540 becomes a strong level, and the previous rotation angle of the handle 182 is sent. The striking force based on the above changes to the strong level at once, and when the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned to the forward position, the striking force due to the rotation of the handle 182 (usually the striking force immediately before) is returned at once. good.

In short, the right handle unit 180(R) of the embodiment has two movable elements that can be displaced in different plane directions, and the displacement of one movable element adjusts the striking force of the ball launcher 540. In this state, it is possible to adjust the striking force of the ball launching device 540 by displacing other movable elements, and when the striking force adjustment by the other movable elements is completed, the striking force adjustment by the one movable element is returned. It has two movable elements, for example, a rotatably supported handle 182 and an entire handle unit 180 movably supported in a different plane direction. While adjusting the striking force of the shooting device 540, it is possible to adjust the striking force of the ball shooting device 540 by moving and displacing the handle unit 180 as a whole, and ending the striking force adjustment by moving and displacing the handle unit 182 as a whole. As a result, the normal game is performed by adjusting the hitting force with one movable element, and the strong hitting required when changing to a special game state is performed. The force can be exerted in a so-called interrupt state by displacement of other movable elements, while when the special game state ends, the force adjustment by the other movable elements can be easily and accurately performed normally by simply ending the adjustment. It is possible to return to the game state of.

The right handle unit 180(R) of the embodiment is constructed as described above, and is positioned in front of the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. Locked by means 4000 . Therefore, as in the pachinko machine 1 of FIGS. 103 to 128, the handle 182 can be rotated together with the decorative handle 1820 to adjust the striking force of the ball shooting device 540. FIG.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 changes to, for example, a special game state due to the progress of the game, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned ON, and the lock arm 4004 changes to the releasing posture in which the roller 4003 is flipped up. , the right handle unit 180(R) is unlocked. Then, from the above-described hitting method instruction means of the pachinko machine 1, characters such as "Push the right handle to the back." An instruction prompting for input by movement of is issued. In response to this, the player pushes the entire unit to the rear position against the force of the spring 4001 without changing the grip of the handle 182 being operated. A new hitting force is added, and the hitting force continuously changes to a strong level. This puts the player in a right-handed state, and the profit of the special game is brought to the player more.

When the special game state ends, at the same time, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned off under the control of the main control unit 1300, and the player is instructed by the above-described hitting method instruction means to "move the right handle." Please return it to the front." When the player relaxes the pressing force on the right handle unit 180(R) according to the instruction, the right handle unit 180(R) returns to the front position due to the bias of the spring 4001. FIG. Then, the lock arm 4004 changes to a horizontal lock posture by the force of the torsion coil spring (not shown), and lies like a supporting rod between the handle base 181 and the handle mounting member 102 of the right handle unit 180(R). Lock unit 180(R) in the forward position.

As a result, the pachinko machine 1 returns to the normal game state, but at this time, the degree of grip (rotational angle) of the handle 182 of the right handle unit 180 (R) is maintained by the player himself in the state immediately before the start of the special game. Therefore, the normal game is resumed with the striking force immediately before changing to the special game state. By the way, since the conventional handle unit adjusts the hitting force by operating one handle, it is necessary to search for the optimum hitting force again when returning from the right-handed state to the normal game state. It may be wasted.

[Left handle unit]
The left handle unit 180(L) is used as an input means for the player of the player participation type performance as described above. The left handle unit 180(L) has a structure substantially symmetrical with respect to the right handle unit 180(R) with respect to the vertical axis passing through substantially the center of the door frame 3. The control means 4000 is unique with a cam mechanism.

[Handle position control means (left)]
The handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as "left handle position control means") 4000 of the left handle unit 180(L) is based on the cam mechanism as described above, and is provided on the base portion 181a of the handle base 181. A rotatable follower roller 4007, an elongated hole 4008 formed in the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 for passing the follower roller 4007, and a cylindrical cam rotatably fitted to the outside of the cylindrical portion 102a. 4009 , a cam portion 4010 provided on the cylindrical cam 4009 , and a motor (not shown) that transmits rotational force to a gear 4011 provided at the end of the cylindrical cam 4009 .

The cam portion 4010 includes a first cam surface 4012 formed parallel to the end surface (rear end surface) of the cylindrical cam 4009 opposite to the gear 4011, and an end surface (front end surface) on the side of the gear 4011. It consists of a second cam surface 4013 formed parallel to the end surface at a position near the side, and an inclined third cam surface 4014 connecting the second cam surface 4013 and the first cam surface 4012 .
As described above, the left handle unit 180(L) is slidably supported by the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 and always biased toward the player by the spring 4001 loaded in the cylindrical portion 102a. However, its position is controlled by the manner of engagement between the follower roller 4007 and the cam portion 4010 provided on the left handle unit 180(L).

137, the left handle unit 180(L) is in the rear position with the follower roller 4007 in contact with the first cam surface 4012 of the cam portion 4010, and as shown in FIG. The left handle unit 180 (R) is in the forward position with the roller 4007 in contact with the second cam surface 4013 of the cam portion 4010 .
Therefore, when the left handle unit 180(L) is in the rear position as shown in FIG. 137 and the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated clockwise in FIG. After reaching the second cam surface 4013 through the inclination of the cam surface 4014, the left handle unit 180(L) moves to the front position as shown in FIG. The cam portion 4010 has an open space at the rear so that the follower roller 4007 can be freely moved rearward. When pushed against the bias of 4001, it sinks to the rearward position within the hand cover portion 195, and when the force is released, it returns to the forward position by the bias of spring 4001. Therefore, the left handle unit 180(L) located in the front position can be freely moved forward and backward in a straight line depending on the strength of the player.
When the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. It returns to the first cam surface 4012 through the cam surface 4014, and in this state the left handle unit 180(L) moves back to the rear position as shown in FIG.

The left handle unit 180(L) of the embodiment is constructed as described above, and is located at the rear position within the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. 137 during normal game play. The left handle unit 180(L) at this rear position is hidden by the forward protruding structure composed of the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, and the like, and is hardly noticeable to the player. In addition, since it is surrounded by the hand cover portion 195 and the projection to the outside can be minimized, it is less susceptible to external shocks that may lead to breakage, and the risk of injury due to contact is also reduced. By the way, currently, a large lever or the like is used as an input means for players in a player participation type production, but if it always protrudes close to the player's hands or knees, it will receive an impact that can lead to damage. In addition, there is a risk that the player may come into contact with it and be injured.

As the game progresses, a player-participation-type effect is executed, and in a scene where player input is required, first, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 is rotated under the control of the main control unit 1300. Due to the rotation of the cam portion 4010 and the force of the spring 4001, the left handle unit 180(L) linearly moves toward the player side together with the follower roller 4007 and stops at the front position. In this state, it looks as if the left handle unit 180 (L) has appeared from the player's point of view. , or pressing operation of the left handle unit 180(L) is requested by display, voice, or the like. When the player rotates the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180(L) or pushes the left handle unit 180(L) in response to this, the operation is detected and the production shifts to the next scene. After that, the performance further progresses and ends as appropriate.
In addition, in the handle unit 180 of the embodiment, since the periphery of the gripped hand is surrounded by the decorative handle 1820, there is no possibility that the fingers will come into contact with the hand cover portion 195 even if the rotation or pushing operation is performed. Less risk of injury. Thus, the ornamental handle 1820 that encloses the grasping hand and can rotate or move with the hand can be effectively referred to as an "outer ring" that can protect the operating fingers.

Next, when the above effect is completed, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 rotates in the reverse direction, and the cam portion 4010 contacting the follower roller 4007 moves from the second cam surface 4013 to the third cam surface 4014 to the third cam surface 4014. It changes to 1 cam surface 4012 . In the meantime, the follower roller 4007 is pushed backward along the slope of the third cam surface 4014, so that the left handle unit 180(L) moves back from the front position against the bias of the spring 4001, and the follower roller The rear position is reached when 4007 contacts the first cam surface 4012 . The cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 stops here, and the left handle unit 180(L) waits at the rear position until the next performance is executed.

As is clear from the above description, the left handle unit 180 (L) is capable of effecting and inputting actions substantially equivalent to those of the effect operating section 301 .
For this reason, for example, if the left handle unit 180 (L) and the production operation section 301 are operated under the same control and inputs from both sensors are received, both the left handle unit 180 (L) and the production operation section 301 can be used. .
In this case, for example, a player who is embarrassed by the large action of operating the effect operation section 301 can place his or her hand on the left handle unit 180(L) in advance and perform the operation with the least noticeable movement. Therefore, it is possible to casually participate in the player-participation type production, which increases interest.
In addition, whether the operation unit used in the player participation type production is the left handle unit 180 (L) or the production operation unit 301 can be determined in advance by, for example, providing a selection switch on a part of the front bulging structure. The player may be allowed to choose.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is of course not limited to the above embodiments. For example, a handle unit having the same structure as the right handle unit 180 (R) of the embodiment may be installed at the place where the left handle unit 180 (L) is installed, and it may be used as an input means for the player in the player participation type production. Often, and vice versa, a handle unit having the same structure as the left handle unit 180 (L) of the embodiment is installed at the place where the right handle unit 180 (R) is installed, and it is used to adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540. may be used as an input means for

Moreover, although two handle units 180 are provided in the embodiment, the number of handle units 180 may be one.
Further, in the embodiment, the handle unit 180 is provided with the handle 182, but the handle unit 180 may not be provided and the input for the game can be performed only by the linear movement operation of the handle unit 180. FIG.

In addition, although a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine in the embodiment, it can be applied to other gaming machines such as a mammoth ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates reels. When applied to a slot machine, one or two handle units 180 may be used as input means for player participation type presentation.

1 … Pachinko machine (game machine)
3 ... Door frame 180 ... Handle unit 180 (R) ... Right handle unit 180 (L) ... Left handle unit 182 ... Handle (operation unit)
1820 ... decorative handle (operation unit)
182g to 182j … Finger hook (operation part)
201 ... upper plate (forward bulging structure)
300 ... production operation unit (front swelling structure)

Claims (1)

A front constituent member which is attached from the front side of the game panel and which is attached from the rear side of the game panel, and which has a partition part that partitions a game area in which the game medium can roll and a non-game area in which the game medium cannot roll. A gaming machine having a back side configuration unit,
The front side constituent member includes a game area side design portion which is visible when the game area side is viewed from the front, and which is visible when the non-game area side is viewed from the front. The non-game area side design part provided on the non-game area side is provided on the non-game area side, and the game area side design part provided on the game area side and the non-game area side design part provided on the non-game area side are unified. has a design with
The back side structural unit is provided with a back side decorative portion having a predetermined decoration on the back side of the design of the front side structural member,
An intermediate design portion having uniformity with the design of the game area side design portion is provided on the near side of the back side decorative portion provided in the back side structural unit, and the game medium rolls on the front surface of the intermediate design portion. A game medium can be positioned in front of the intermediate design portion by making it a possible game area,
The rear side structural unit attached from the rear side of the game panel has a light emitting part, and the light emitted from the light emitting part emitted from the rear side of the game panel is softened in an indirect lighting manner by the design of the front side structural member. , the game machine characterized in that the light shielding property of the design of the front component member is enhanced .

Images